JP2018086512A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine allowing a player to easily determine whether games can be finished immediately or not.SOLUTION: If a variation presentation being performed is to become a big win, or if a variation presentation to become a big win exists among variation presentations being held, upon a trigger of a player giving a pressing operation to a notification button 23, a display is performed in which the hair HB of a boy that is normally in a black color is changed in a gold color, as a big win notification image for making a notification of the existence of the big win. Further, each variation time is displayed for the variation presentations to be performed till the big win is achieved.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a display medium such as a liquid crystal display device performs a variable display (variation effect) of a symbol or the like, a game medium such as a ball enters the start winning opening and a start winning is detected. In some cases, the variable effect related to the start winning is suspended with a predetermined number as the upper limit. When the variation effect being executed is completed, the execution of the variation effect related to the start winning that is detected first among the pending unexecuted variation effects is started (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-340046 A

  In conventional gaming machines, if the player wants to stop the game and leave the game, or if he wants to complete a call or email with a mobile phone in the middle of the game, There is a possibility that there is a variation effect that is a hit among the variation effects that are on hold, so it is difficult for the player to stop the game immediately and leave, or to start a message in the middle of the game There is a problem.

  The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-described problems and the like, and provides a gaming machine that allows a player to easily determine whether or not to stop the game immediately. Objective.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an acquisition unit that acquires information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a determination unit that performs determination based on information acquired by the acquisition unit. Dynamic display execution means for causing the display means to dynamically display identification information based on the determination result by the determination means, and in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means When predetermined identification information appears, a predetermined game value is given to the player, and a predetermined number is used until at least the information acquired by the acquisition means is used for determination by the determination means. Storage means for storing as an upper limit; calculation means for calculating an execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means; An operation means capable of performing an operation, a detection means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, and the detection means detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. A notification means for notifying the execution time calculated by the calculation means.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the calculation unit executes the dynamic display time of the identification information that is executed based on each of the information stored in the storage unit. And the remaining execution time until the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means is completed, and the notification means The execution time calculated by the calculation means and the remaining execution time are notified as the execution time left when it is detected that a predetermined operation has been performed.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination unit performs determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit until it is used for determination by at least the determination unit. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit, the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit, Execution of dynamic display of identification information based on the information is suspended. Here, each execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information for which execution is suspended is calculated by the calculation means. The Then, when the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit that can be operated by the player, the notification unit notifies the execution time calculated by the calculation unit. Thereby, when a player performs predetermined operation with respect to an operation means, based on the alert | report by an alerting | reporting means, each execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information with which execution was suspended can be grasped | ascertained. Therefore, if a player wants to leave or completes a request, if there is a dynamic display of identification information with a long execution time, the player stops the game and leaves the game while the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player easily make a decision to finish the business.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, not only the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information that is suspended, but also the dynamic display execution The calculation means, including the remaining execution time until the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the means is completed, and the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. The execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information pending execution calculated by the calculation means and the remaining execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. The notification means notifies the user. Thereby, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, based on the notification by the notification means, not only the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, but also the identification information being executed It is possible to make the player grasp the remaining variation time of the dynamic display. Therefore, if a player wants to leave or completes a task, if the remaining execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed is long, he will immediately stop the game and try to leave or complete the task. There is an effect that the player can easily make the determination.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a holding ball storage area, and a holding ball execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot type table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot type table, (c) is the number of reservation balls 2 It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for jackpots in the case of (2), and (d) is the figure which showed typically an example of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table when the number of reservation balls is 2 (E) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table when the number of reserved balls is two. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the prefetch information storage area. (A) is a figure which shows the state in which the jackpot notification image was displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is a figure which shows the state in which the variation production notification image was displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus. . It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table for a fluctuation | variation. It is the figure which showed an example of the additional data table typically. It is the figure which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the notification process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the notification button determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus, (b) showed the notification execution determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart. It is the flowchart which showed the ball | bowl launch stop determination process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the notification display setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the notification stop determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus, (b) shows the notification button invalid cancellation | release process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is a flowchart. (A) is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus, (C) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the reservation ball number command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the confirmation command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the variable time notification command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (C) is a flowchart showing a notification stop command process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed a part of display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the jackpot notification image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is. (A) is the flowchart which showed the change time notification image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) showed the notification image deletion process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, 65a and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front. On the right side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 as viewed from the front, a notification button 23 is provided.

  The frame button 22 is, for example, a button that is pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for causing the player to select the contents of the so-called super reach, which is an aspect of the fluctuation effect.

  The variation effect is an effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and, as will be described later, a ball fired on the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (a first entrance 64 described later). (See Fig. 2)) When the ball is entered (start winning), the symbol (third symbol to be described later) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then the start winning is determined by the combination of symbols that are stopped. This is an effect of presenting the player with the result of the lottery performed (whether or not it is a big hit).

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. Various effects such as the above-described variation effects and reach effects executed during the variation effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

  The stage change is performed when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during a high-speed fluctuation in which the 3rd symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation manner invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, it is repeatedly changed in the order of “city stage” → “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  Further, when the normal reach effect is started in the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, the selection screen for the super reach effect mode is displayed in the third symbol during the normal reach. It is configured to be displayed on the display device 81.

  On the selection screen, a plurality of effect mode candidates that can be selected as the effect mode of super reach are displayed, and one of the effect mode candidates is selected. If the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect mode candidate is changed. Then, based on the production mode candidate selected when developing into super reach, the production mode of super reach is determined, and super reach is executed in the third symbol display device 81 according to the production mode.

  In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. However, instead of the frame button 22, the player makes a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10). , Rearward, rightward and leftward), and may be configured by an operation lever that can be tilted. Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the super reach effect mode may be selected.

  The notification button 23 is a push operation type button, and when the push operation is continued for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 1 second), the change that is a big hit among the currently executed variable effect and the pending variable effect. When there is an effect, this is a button for notifying the player to that effect.

  As will be described in detail later, the pachinko machine 10 detects a ball entering the first ball slot 64 (start winning prize) while a variation effect is being executed on the third symbol display device 81. The variation effect is put on hold up to a predetermined number (4 in this pachinko machine 10). Then, when the variation effect being executed is finished, the execution of the variation effect held first is started. At the start of this execution, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the winning effect is a big win.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be pre-read and determined before the start of the variation effect as to whether or not the result is a big hit in the variation effect that is put on hold. When the notification button 23 is continuously pressed by the player for a predetermined time (one second), the notification button 23 is being executed based on the lottery result performed for the variation effect being executed and the determination result based on the prefetching. It is determined whether or not there is a variation effect that is a jackpot among the variation effects and the pending variation effect, and if there is a variation effect that is a jackpot, a notification to that effect is made.

  As a result, when the player wants to leave the game after stopping the game, or when he wants to finish a message such as a phone call or email, the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time. It is possible to know whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effects of the present and the pending variation effects.

  Therefore, if there is no change effect that is a big hit, the player can make a determination to stop the game immediately in order to perform an action such as leaving or completing a business. Further, if there is a fluctuating effect that is a big hit, the player can make a decision to continue the game until the big hit. In other words, the notification button 23 can determine whether or not the player can immediately perform the action when he / she wants to leave the seat or complete the business.

  Further, in this embodiment, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), it is determined whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect being executed and the variation effect being held. Not announced. Unless there are special circumstances, such as when you want to stop a game and leave, or when you want to complete a call or email on your mobile phone, Knowing whether or not any of these will be a big hit before the on-hold variation effect is executed, on the contrary, the game is deprived.

  In the present embodiment, the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), and notification is made as to whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect that is being executed and the variation effect that is being held. If, for example, the player touches the notification button 23 unintentionally, and the touched time is less than the predetermined time, a jackpot is included in either the running variation effect or the pending variation effect. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the

  Note that a notification method when the notification button 23 is pressed will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, on the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front, there is provided a display lamp 34 with a built-in light emitting means such as an LED that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit.

  In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown).

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The ball entrance 64, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the wood screw is provided from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The plurality of LEDs 37a display a change by indicating whether or not the change is made in accordance with the entry to the first entry port 64 (start winning prize) by a lighting state, or a stop pattern after the end of the change. As for the ball (reserved ball) that has not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64, the symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start prize is indicated by the lighting state. The number of reserved balls, which is a number, is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  The pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit with respect to the entrance to the first entrance 64 (a lottery lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared.

  The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change executed in accordance with the entrance to the first entrance 64. Indicates the symbol corresponding to the jackpot type.

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of two It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds and becomes a short-time state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). .

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probability change, probability change state), in other words, transition to the special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to play. The high probability state (during probability change, probability change state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which a hit probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and a ball easily enters the first entrance 64.

  On the other hand, the “low probability state” means a time when the probability change is not in progress and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that at the time of probability change. Also, the short-time state (short-time medium) in the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased and the first entrance entrance It means a game state in which a ball can easily enter 64.

  Instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is opened or the electric accessory is per hit It is good also as what changes the frequency | count of opening. Specifically, in the short-time state, the time for opening the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is made longer than in the case other than the time-short state, or the number of times the electric combination is released per hit. You may increase more than the case other than a time-short state. Further, in the short-time state, at least two of the increase in the probability of hitting the second symbol, the lengthening of the opening time of the electric accessory, and the increase in the number of opening times of the electric accessory may be performed simultaneously. Good.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 uses a ball entering the first ball inlet 64 (start winning prize) as a trigger, and synchronizes with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37, and the variable display of the third symbol (variable effect). A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as “display device”), and an LED that variably displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a ball at the second entrance 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch large liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) to be described later, for example, left, middle and right The three symbol rows are displayed.

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display is performed accordingly. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variation display (variation effect) in which the same main symbols are arranged is performed, The jackpot is generated after the change display is finished. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display in which the main symbols (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) to which odd numbers are added is arranged. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts in the vertical direction, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area in which the third symbol is variablely displayed (variable effect). Dm and the other upper third are sub display areas Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, and the like. In addition, a reserved ball number display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls is provided in the lower bottom side center portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, the symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display region Dm1, the symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display region Dm2, and the display region A symbol row Z3 is displayed in Dm3.

  In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each variation effect, the third symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Stopped display. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and notice effect images, respectively. The image displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 gives the player an expectation that is a big hit as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The reserved ball number display area Db is an area for displaying the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose variation display (variation effect) has not been executed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64. is there.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action or is usually a black boy. A notice effect is performed when the color of the hair, the color of the normal white bee, or the appearance of another character appears.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first entrance 64 while a variation effect (variation display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times of entry is Holds up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the reserved ball number display area Db. In the reserved ball number display area Db, one reserved ball number symbol (“●” symbol) is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. .

  That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, Indicates that the number of balls is four. Further, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is configured to be held up to four times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to four times, but three times. You may set below or 5 times (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved ball number display area Db, the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four areas is set for the number of reserved balls. Only different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” are alternately lit as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the second entrance 67. Is what you do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the first entrance 64 is activated for a predetermined time (opened). Configured).

  The number of passing balls through the second entrance 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of balls held is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above and also displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holdings is displayed by the number of lights of the second symbol holding lamp 84.

  Note that the second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage of the second entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the first entrance 64, but is limited to 4 times or less, or 5 times (for example, , 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first entrance 64 into which a sphere can enter is disposed. When a ball enters the first entrance 64, a first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) draws a jackpot, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 changes the third symbol. Production is performed. The first entrance 64 is also one of the entrances through which 5 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  The first entrance 64 is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering an opening through which the ball enters the first entrance 64. The electric accessory opens or closes the two blades to bring the first entrance 64 into an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). In normal times, the first entrance 64 is in a closed state in which the blades of the electric accessory are closed (the blades stand up), and the ball cannot enter the first entrance 64, or It is difficult to enter the ball.

  On the other hand, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol “◯”, the electric accessory of the first entrance 64 is operated for a predetermined time. From the state where the blades of the electric accessory stand upward while the electric accessory is being operated. The first entrance 64 is in an open state in a state of being substantially V-shaped (inverted C-shaped). When the first entrance 64 is in an open state, the sphere can enter the first entrance 64 or a state in which the sphere is easier to enter than in the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, when the symbol “○” stops and wins, and the first entrance 64 is in an open state, the ball enters the first entrance 64. It is possible to enter a state where many lottery lotteries can be made by entering the ball.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  A second entrance 67 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80. The second entrance 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for passing a sphere in the vertical direction. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the second entrance 67, a second entrance switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the on. Then, a lottery for the second symbol (also referred to as a normal symbol) is performed.

  As a result of lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the ball that has passed through the second entrance 67, the second symbol display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. After the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed through the above, the electric accessory of the first entrance 64 is activated. As a result, the blade of the electric accessory that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the first entrance 64 moves from a substantially upright state to a substantially V-shape (reverse C-shape) for a predetermined time. A state in which the sphere can enter the first entrance 64 or a state in which the sphere is easier to enter than in the closed state.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In the main control device 110, the main hits of the pachinko machine 10 such as big hitting lottery, setting of variable display (variation effect) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 are performed. Execute the process. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, and a variation pattern table 202d. The main controller 110 executes the above main control by using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters are used mainly for lottery lottery, setting of variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of display results of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used by the MPU 201 of the control device 110. In the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIG.

  In setting the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first jackpot symbol used for selecting the jackpot symbol. A per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting an initial value of the first per-random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. .

  The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 20). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203b including four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of these areas, a first entrance 64 is provided. Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first per-random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1. The random number counter C1 is updated.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 20).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 receives the ball at the first entrance 64 (start winning). Is stored in any one of the reserved areas 1 to 4 provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that is a big jackpot, the jackpot is determined.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (period in which the probability change is not in progress), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot than the low probability state. There are two types of high-probability states that are used in the case of high-probability states with high probability (during probability change). The numbers of random numbers that are jackpots included in the low-probability state and the high-probability state are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the low probability state is 3, and the values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the big hit random number table 202a. ing.

  On the other hand, in the high probability state, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are jackpots is 30, and the values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322” , 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. .

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a so that the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state are not duplicated. It is set. Here, if there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned increases. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit, Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2, for example, is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), Among the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203 b of the RAM 203, the same is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area where the first random number counter C <b> 1 is stored.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the variation pattern in the variation effect In addition, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those for the big hit. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds. There is a “15R normal jackpot” that becomes a short-time state during the number of fluctuations, and a “2R probability variable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a value of a first jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 7B, the value “0-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable big hit, and the value “40˜ 79 ”is associated, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation big hit.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20”, “15R probability variable big hit” is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “60”, the big hit type is “ If “15R normal jackpot” is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probability variation jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of jackpot, the 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and the 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . Note that the probability that each jackpot type is selected in the case of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table.

  The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each gaming state is prepared, and the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type in each jackpot type table may be changed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. 3 stoppages: “rear out of front / rear”, where the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol, and “completely out” where no reach occurs. A production) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 Among the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b, it is stored in the same reserved area as the reserved area where the first random number counter C1 is stored.

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C <b> 3, a plurality of stop pattern tables 202 c having different ranges of random number values to be selected for the stop type are provided in the ROM 202. The plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a large stop pattern table 202c having a random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, “completely out” is easily selected. In this stop pattern table 202c, the “rear and back-off reach” is narrowed to 98,99, and the “reach other than back-and-forth off” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and “rear and back-off reach” and “reach other than back-and-forth off” are difficult to select. Become.

  In the low probability state, a stop pattern table having a narrow range of random values ranging from 0 to 79 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” in order to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64. 202c is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. In this stop pattern table 202c, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and back deviation” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front and rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time, so it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 is continued. It becomes easy to be done. Also in the latter stop pattern table 202c, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 20).

  The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, the MPU 201 determines the variation pattern by using the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202d stored in the ROM 202. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The change mode is determined, and the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect are determined.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a big hit variation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of a big hit and a deviation variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 used at the time of a loss as the fluctuation pattern table 202d. Also, as the deviation variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3, depending on whether the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, or a normal low-probability state excluding the short-time state, A fluctuation pattern table 202d3 and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 are prepared.

  Furthermore, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 203d3 includes a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 0 (that is, when there is no reserved ball), a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 1, A table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is four are provided separately.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to prepare a variation pattern table for each number of reserved balls, and each variation pattern table 202d1 to 203d3 is simply changed so that the table referred to on the basis of the number of reserved balls is changed. May be prepared. For example, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 203d3 may be prepared separately for a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than 3, and a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more. . Further, in each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 203d3, the condition of the number of reserved balls for determining a table to be referred to may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 includes a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than three and a table that is referred to when the number of retained balls is three or more. A different table 202d2 may be prepared for each number of reserved balls, and a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 may be prepared regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, out of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type regardless of the number of reserved balls. Specifically, it is divided into 15R jackpot common jackpots that are referenced when 15R probability variable jackpots and 15R regular jackpots are determined as jackpot types, and 2R probability variable jackpots that are referenced when 2R probability variable jackpots are determined. Yes. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that is a big hit (big hit random number value), the variation pattern according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area A group to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is determined. In the group (group) of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect reserved in the reserved area. Is done.

  In common with 15R jackpot, three variation patterns of variation A with a variation time of 30 seconds, variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds, and variation C with a variation time of 90 seconds are selectable. Is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The variation A is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 performs a so-called normal reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach with a short variation time. The variation B is a variation pattern in which the so-called super reach in which the third symbols are arranged after the reach having a variation time longer than the normal reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81. Super reach includes, for example, reach that develops from normal reach and long reach that simply takes a long time to reach. The variation C is a variation pattern in which the so-called special reach in which the third symbols are arranged after the reach having a longer variation time than the super reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The special reach includes, for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach, and a special reach in which the development destination from the normal reach is different from the super reach.

  In the example shown in FIG. 7C, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 is 0 to 10 for the fluctuation A in the 15R jackpot common table. 11 to 99 for B and 100 to 198 for variation C. In the 15R jackpot common table, since it is selected when the 15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, the variation C for which special reach is executed is easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. It has become. However, by configuring so that the variation A in which normal reach is performed and the variation B in which super reach is performed are selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any reach.

  The pachinko machine 10 has a large number of products with different production contents for each reach. For example, the super-reach includes a rear image (a third image which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81). Reach that quickly changes the image displayed on the back side of the image), reach that suddenly displays a certain character, etc. In addition, a notice effect before the start of fluctuation is added, an effect that becomes a big hit by re-variation A plurality of reach with different production contents, such as those to which is added. The main control device 110 determines only the variation A, the variation B, and the variation C as the variation pattern when the 15R probability variation big hit or the 15R normal big hit, and the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 determines each variation A˜. A detailed variation pattern corresponding to C is determined. In accordance with the detailed variation pattern, a variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 91.

  For the 2R probability variation jackpot only, only the variation pattern of “2R variation” with a variation time of 59 seconds is prepared. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, regardless of the number of reserved balls, in the group dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpots, as shown in FIG. 0R) is associated with 2R fluctuations. That is, when the jackpot variation type is 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R variation is always selected as the variation pattern.

  When the 2R variation is selected by the main control device 110, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Therefore, when 2R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot type in main controller 110, variation effect is executed on third symbol display device 81 by a detailed variation pattern corresponding to 2R variation. In this pachinko machine 10, as a detailed variation pattern corresponding to 2R variation, for example, while displaying characters such as “chicken” or “girl” in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, finally, A variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol, a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol in accordance with lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, and the like are included.

  The variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether to add a notice effect for predicting the start of a jackpot or reach production before the start of the change or during the change production may be determined by another variation type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols of the third symbol to be stopped are shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol shifted back and forth).

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpot is provided, but in the case of this pachinko machine 10, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, only the variation pattern of “2R variation” is selected. Instead of providing a group dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpots, only the association between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in the case of 15R probability variation jackpots or 15R normal jackpots may be defined in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. In this case, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is set as the jackpot type, the 2R variation may be determined as the variation pattern without referring to the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, only “2R fluctuation” is selected when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, but when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns. You may do it. In this case, even in a group dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpots, such as a common group for 15R jackpot, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and a certain reserved area is assigned. The variation pattern associated with the stored value of the variation type counter CS1 may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect reserved in the reserved area.

  FIG. 7D schematically shows an example of the extraordinary (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is two of the extraordinary (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (d), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is used only for complete disconnection, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, front / rear reach reach, and front / rear disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach common that is referenced when a reach other than is determined, and the stop type at the time of a break, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached.

  When the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is not a big hit value (big hit random value), that is, a value that is out of the game, the gaming state is the normal time except for the short-time state When in the low probability state, according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first per random number counter C1, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the hold area The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  For complete deviation only, two variation patterns, a variation D with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation E with a variation time of 10 seconds, are prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each variation pattern. It is associated. When the variation D or the variation E is selected as the variation pattern, the third symbol variation device 81 executes a variation effect that is stopped and displayed without reaching reach after the high-speed variation of the third symbol is started. As shown in FIG. 7 (d), in the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence between the fluctuations dedicated to complete deviation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation D. 0 to 98, variation E is 99 to 198.

  In addition, for the reach in common, the above-described three variations A to C, that is, the variation A in which the variation time is 30 seconds and the normal reach is executed by the third symbol variation device 81, and the super reach is defined in the variation time 60 seconds. Three variation patterns are prepared so as to be selectable: variation B executed by the 3 symbol display device 81 and variation C executed by the 3 symbol display device 81 for a special reach when the variation time is 90 seconds. In the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the variation common to reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with variation A of 0 to 98 and variation B of 99 to 190. The variation C is 191-198.

  FIG. 7E schematically shows an example of a deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is two of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 7E, the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, similarly to the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table. Only for complete outage, in which the variation D and the variation E can be selected as the variation pattern, and the reach common when the variation other than the front / rear out of reach and the reach other than out of front / rear is determined and the variation A to C can be selected as the variation pattern, Based on the stop type at the time of departure, it is divided into groups (groups), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the change patterns that can be selected in the divided group.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that falls outside, when the gaming state is in a short-time state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is the deviation (probability change) change pattern. It is determined from the table 202d3.

  As shown in FIG. 7 (e), in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the variation D is associated with the variation of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 and when the variation is dedicated to the complete variation. 0 to 190, and the variation E is 191 to 198. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence among the common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A, 99 to 190 for variation B, and 191 to 198 for variation C. ing. That is, the correspondence between each variation common to the reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same in the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of the probability change, the ball is likely to enter the first entrance 64, and there is much complete deviation (variation E) with a long variation time. When it is executed, it takes time until the start of the next variable display, which may cause the player to wait and feel uncomfortable. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable.

  Therefore, if the game state is completely lost when the game state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the complete departure with a shorter variation time than in other game states (normal state excluding the time-short state) ( The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 are configured so that the variation D) can be easily selected. Thereby, by starting the next variation display at an early stage, the possibility of giving the player unpleasant feeling can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). Further, the selection of the detachment type is divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table. However, even if the gaming state is normal, a plurality of reserved balls (for example, In the case of 4 at the maximum, 3 or more), the change display may be terminated at an early stage, and the selection may be made with reference to the deviation (probability change) change pattern table.

  Further, since the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 selected when the fluctuation type is a front / rear reach or non-front / rear reach, is the same regardless of the gaming state, Normally, the variation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 do not include a common reach group, and these variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referred to only when the stop type is completely deviated. In addition, a variation pattern table that is referred to when the stop type becomes reach back and forth reach or reach other than back and forth regardless of the game state may be prepared separately.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 that are selected when the fluctuation type is reach back and forth reach or reach other than back and forth is the same regardless of the gaming state. It may be different depending on the gaming state.

  Furthermore, in each variation pattern table 202d2 and 202d3 for deviation shown in FIG. 7D and FIG. 7E, the variation D and the variation E are simply set to “complete deviation variation”, and the “complete deviation variation” is selected. In such a case, the variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability by referring to another table. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within a range of, for example, 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  In this embodiment, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entrance (through gate) 67. Get when it is done. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. In other words, when the value of the obtained second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined to be a hit, and the symbol “◯” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. While the lighting is displayed, the electric accessory of the first entrance 64 is activated, and the first entrance 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 20).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 displays the big hit lottery and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting (variation effect) and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 20), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 19). Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) is immediately executed as a power failure process.

  The RAM 203 further includes at least a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, and a reserved ball execution area 203c.

  The held ball number counter 203a receives a ball (hereinafter referred to as “start winning”) to the first ball inlet 64 detected in a timer interruption process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. This is a counter that counts up to four times the number of reserved balls (the number of times of waiting) of the variation display (variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37. The reserved ball number counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S613 in FIG. 19). Each time a start winning is detected and the number of spheres held for change display increases, 1 is added to a maximum value of 4 (see S203 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 every time the changing effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 16).

  The value of the held ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of held balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a held ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 15). The held ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the held ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the reserved ball number itself of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of suspensions of the change effect without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a start winning is detected, a reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the number of held balls of the fluctuating effect managed in the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  The sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display hold ball number command for notifying the hold ball number to the display control device 114 every time the number of hold balls managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, not only the value of the held ball number counter 203a added by 1 in the reserved ball number command but also the reserved ball number command. The first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in accordance with the start winning that triggered the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a. Each value of C3 and variation type counter CS1 is also included.

  That is, when there is a start prize, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 are The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the reserved ball number command.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball number command are changed based on the respective values. Prior to the execution of the effect, the pre-reading is performed to determine what the change effect will look like (whether it will be a big hit, what the change time will be, etc.) before the change effect is executed. Then, based on the determination result based on the pre-reading, the execution of various effects is decided, or when the notification button 23 is pressed, there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect being executed and the change effect being held. It is possible to announce whether or not there is.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b includes a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) upon detection of the start winning. It is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 14) that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (start winning), the value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is read from the counter buffer. It is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas (holding first to first) so that data corresponding to one start winning (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) can be stored (holding) up to four times. 4 areas) (see FIG. 6).

  The holding ball execution area 203c is data (each of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as jackpot lottery and setting of variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Value).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 executes processing such as jackpot lottery and setting of variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Of the data corresponding to each start winning (stored in each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the above-mentioned holding ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one start winning is used as the holding ball execution area 203c. Shift to. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, change display (change effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Used by.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first jackpot type used for determining the jackpot type A winning type symbol counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining a stop type at the time of losing, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining a variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning).

  The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are stored. A type counter storage area 203b2 per unit, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

  In this embodiment, the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per-type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. However, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the first entrance 64 is up to four times. In this case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). . That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the older start prize is stored in time, and the data corresponding to the oldest start prize is stored in the hold first area.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In the reserved ball execution area 203c, similarly to the reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type classification counter C2 are stored. A first hit type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

  When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, the data stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the reserved ball. The execution area 203c is shifted to each of the areas 203c1 to 203c4. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 17), and the big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are set. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main control device 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the change pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the random number value in the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved first area is transferred to the first per-random number counter storage area 203c1 in the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number value in the first per category counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first per category counter storage area 203c2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. The random number value in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  When the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203c ends, the holding first area becomes empty, and is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203b. Shift processing is performed to pack the data in the area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Here, a data shift performed for each reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the fluctuating effect is made is “4”, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. To do. In this state, when the data of the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c and the reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 stores the data of the other areas (second to fourth) respectively. Shift to the area with the smaller number (first to third). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the changing effect is performed is “2”, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area. The data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (2nd-4th) may be shifted to the area where an area number is one smaller irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the creation of the program can be facilitated.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, fluctuating effects and continuous The setting of the display mode of the effect performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, such as a notice effect, is controlled.

  The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 425 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22, notification button 23, and various switches 208 are connected to input / output port 425, respectively. The various switches 208 are also connected to the main controller 110. The general winning port switch for detecting a ball that has entered the general winning port 63 shown in FIG. A first winning entry switch to be detected, a specific winning entry switch for detecting a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, and a ball guided to the ball discharge path through the out opening 66 are detected. The output signal of each switch is input to the input / output port of the sound lamp control device 113.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect mode at the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the frame button 22 is operated for purposes other than changing the stage, such as changing the super-reach effect, a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the frame button operation command.

  In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 determines the operation state of the notification button 23, and when it is determined that the notification button 23 is pressed down continuously for one second, the variation effect being executed and the change effect being held are held. It is determined by pre-reading processing whether there is a fluctuating effect that is a big hit. If there is a variation effect that is a big hit among these variation effects, a jackpot notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Thereby, the image which shows that the big hit is contained in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be displayed.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores at least a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, and a variation pattern table 222d as fixed value data in addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221. ing. These tables 222a to 222d are the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, jackpot type table 202b, stop pattern table 202c, and variation pattern table 202d provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 201.

  The sound lamp control device 113 is acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 in accordance with the start winning prize, and is transmitted by the reserved ball number command, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Based on each value of the variation type counter CS1, the big hit random number table 222a, the big hit type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the fluctuation pattern table 222d, the prefetching process is executed.

  Then, by this pre-reading process, what kind of effect will result in the pending variation effect that is the target of the pre-read process (whether it will be a big hit, what will be the variation time, etc.) If the execution of various effects is determined or the notification button 23 is pressed, there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the currently performed variation effect and the pending variation effect. Control to announce whether or not.

  The RAM 223 includes a held ball counter 223a, a prefetch information storage area 223b, a notification button on counter 223c, a notification execution flag 223d, a notification execution counter 223e, a ball non-detection counter 223f, a ball launch stop flag 223g, a notification button invalid flag 223h, At least a confirmation command flag 223i is provided.

  The reserved ball number counter 223a is a variation effect (variable display) performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), like the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110, and is the main control. It is a counter that counts up to four times the number of balls on hold (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuating effects held in the device 110.

  As described above, the sound lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores / updates the number of held balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and manages the number of held balls by the reserved ball number counter 223a. .

  Specifically, the voice lamp control device 113 adds the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a in the main control device 110 when the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect is added by entering the first entrance 64. When the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, the value after addition of the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the reserved ball number command (that is, the main controller 110 holds the Is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a (see S1007 in FIG. 23).

  In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the held ball number counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and the third symbol is received in response to the reception. When the variation effect mode in the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 24). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the held ball number counter 223a in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the held ball number counter 203a. The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203a.

  The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the reserved ball number indicated by the command in the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command, or the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the variation pattern command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the stored ball count counter 223a after the storage or after the update, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display-reserved ball number command, it displays a hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (see S1951 in FIG. 37A).

  As described above, the value of the held ball number counter 223a is changed in synchronization with the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Accordingly, the number of reserved balls displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while being synchronized with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls on which the variation effect is reserved.

  The prefetch information storage area 223b is information for performing prefetch processing, that is, the first per-random number counter C1 and the first random number counter C1 that are acquired from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 upon starting winning and are transmitted by the reserved ball number command. This is an area for storing each value of the hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. The sound lamp control device 113 executes a prefetch process using the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222.

  Here, the details of the prefetch information storage area 223b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the prefetch information storage area 223b. The prefetch information storage area 223b has five areas of prefetch information 0th to 4th areas. In each of the prefetch information 0th to 4th areas, a first per random number counter storage area 223b1 in which the value of the first per random number counter C1 is stored, and a first per type that stores the value of the first per type counter C2 are stored. At least a counter storage area 223b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 223b3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and a variation type counter storage area 223b4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

  The pre-read information 0th area is an area for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the currently executed variable effect. The pre-read information first to fourth areas are areas for storing the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the maximum four variable effects. Specifically, the pre-read information first area is an area corresponding to the variable effect that is first reserved among the variable effects that are reserved, and the pre-read information second area is the variable effect that is reserved. Of these, the area corresponding to the variation effect that is held second oldest in time, and the pre-read information third area is the area corresponding to the variation effect that is reserved third oldest in time The pre-reading information fourth area is an area corresponding to the variation effect that is held fourth oldest in time among the variation effects that are reserved.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserve ball number command from the main control device 110, the speech lamp control device 113 holds the values of the first random number counter C1, the first per category counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1. Extracted from the ball number command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the extracted values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 as random numbers in areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command in the first to fourth areas of prefetch information. The data is stored in the counter storage area 223b1, the first hit type counter storage area 223b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223b3, and the variation type counter storage area 223b4.

  Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ N ≦ 4), the number of fluctuating effects held at that time is N, and the reserved ball number command includes Since the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included correspond to the X-th variation variation effect that is temporally reserved among the suspended variation representations, each counter storage area 223b1 of the pre-read information X area. Store the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to .about.b4. At this time, main controller 110 stores the values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the reserved X area of reserved ball number storage area 203b. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved X area of the main controller 110 are stored in the prefetch information X area.

  On the other hand, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a change pattern command that means the start of the change effect from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 performs a shift process in each area of the prefetch information storage area 223b. That is, since the suspended variation effect is reduced by one and the execution of the variation effect that is first suspended in time is started, each of the pre-read information first areas corresponding to the first variation variation effect that has been suspended The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the prefetch information 0th area corresponding to the currently executed variation effect.

  Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the prefetch information second area are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the prefetch information first area, and the prefetch information first The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the three areas are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the prefetch information second area, and the counters of the prefetch information fourth area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223b1 to b4 are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the prefetch information third area.

  Thereby, the same value as each counter C1-C3, CS1 stored in the reservation ball | bowl execution area 203c of the main controller 110 will be stored in the prefetch information 0th area, and the prefetch information 1st-4th. In the areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored. That is, in the sound lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variation effects held by the main control device 110 are stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b.

  When the pre-reading process is performed, the sound lamp control device 113 grasps the number of fluctuating effects (the number of reserved balls) held from the reserved ball number counter 223a. Based on the number of reserved balls, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the areas where the variation effect is reserved among the first to fourth areas of the prefetch information are prefetched. Whether or not, the variation time, and the like are determined. For example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is “1”, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuating effect is one, and therefore the stored values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored only for the first area of the prefetch information. Read ahead and make a decision. Further, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is “4”, the number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect is 4, so that the stored counters C1 to C3 are stored for each of the pre-read information first to fourth areas. , CS1 is prefetched and a determination is made.

  The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 only in one direction, and the sound lamp control device 113 accesses the RAM 203 and the like of the main control device 110. I can't. On the other hand, the sound lamp control device 113 has a pre-read information storage area 223b and stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the variable effects held by the main control device 110 in the sound lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the pre-read information storage area 223b, the pre-read process can be executed by the sound lamp control device 113. That is, when the suspended variation effect is executed, the result of the variation effect will be determined (whether it will be a big hit, the change time, etc.) before executing the variation effect, When execution of various effects is decided, or when the notification button 23 is pressed, it is notified whether there is a change effect that is a big hit among the change effect being executed and the change effect being held. The control can be executed by an audio lamp control process.

  The above-described shift processing in the prefetch information storage area 223b is based on the number of reserved balls when the variation pattern command is received (the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a before the update based on the reception of the variation pattern command is performed). The data movement (shift) is performed only for the area corresponding to the variation effect reserved among the pre-read information first to fourth areas.

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the reserved ball count counter 223a before the update is “4”, and the data is stored in all areas (prefetch information first to fourth areas) of the prefetch information storage area 223b. Suppose that In this case, the data of the prefetch information first area is shifted to the prefetch information zero area, the data of the prefetch information second area is shifted to the prefetch information first area, and the data of the prefetch information third area is prefetched to the prefetch information second area. To shift the data in the prefetch information fourth area to the prefetch information third area.

  On the other hand, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a before the update when the change pattern command is received is “2”, the data in the pre-read information first area is shifted to the pre-read information zero area, and the pre-read second area data is read out. The data is shifted to the prefetch first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the pre-read information third and fourth areas in which the fluctuating effects are not suspended, the number of data shifts can be reduced, and control is performed. Burden can be reduced.

  Note that, regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data of the prefetch information first to fourth areas may be shifted to an area (prefetch information zeroth to third areas) having a smaller area number. In this case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) for each of the pre-read information first to fourth areas, program creation can be facilitated.

  The notification button on counter 223c is a counter for counting the time during which the notification button 23 is continuously pressed. The notification button on counter 223c is set to 0 as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S810 in FIG. 21) executed when the power is turned on.

  The operating state of the notification button 23 is determined by the notification button determination processing (S1201, FIG. 26A) of the notification processing (S909, FIG. 25) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 22) by the MPU 221. The (1) when the notification button 23 is not pressed, (2) when it is a period during which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 described later is invalid, and (3) notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 In the case where any one of the cases where No. is being executed, the value of the notification button on counter 223c is continuously initialized to 0 (see S1305 in FIG. 26A).

  On the other hand, when the notification button 23 is being pressed in a situation where the notification button 23 is not being pressed and the notification button 23 is not being pressed based on the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalid, Among them, the notification button on counter 223c is incremented by 1 (see S1304 in FIG. 26A).

  Here, the notification process in which the notification button determination process is executed is executed at intervals of 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 22). By updating the notification button on-counter 223c as described above, the notification button 23 is not in a period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalid, and the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed. When the pressing operation is continued, the time during which the pressing operation is continued is counted in units of 1 millisecond. Further, when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is interrupted (when the player releases his / her hand from the notification button 23 being pressed), the notification button on counter 223c is initialized to 0, so that the notification button 23 is again displayed. Can be correctly counted again by the notification button on counter 223c.

  The value of the notification button on counter 223c is referred to in order to determine whether or not the notification button 23 has been pressed down for more than 1 second. That is, in the sound lamp control device 113, the notice execution determination process (see S1202, FIG. 26B) is executed in the notice process (see FIG. 25) executed by the MPU 221, and the value of the notice button on counter 223c is set. Referenced. If the value of the notification button on counter 223c is 1000, it is determined that the notification button 23 has been pressed for 1000 milliseconds, that is, for one second or more, and processing for starting execution of the notification is executed (FIG. 26 (b) S1312). As a result, when the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for 1 second or longer in a situation where the notification button 23 is not being pressed and the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed. Then, notification is made as to whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect being executed and the pending variation effect. Note that the notification button on counter 223c is initialized to 0 when it is determined that the value is 1000 and the notification execution start process is performed (S1314 in FIG. 26B).

  The notification execution flag 223d is a flag for indicating the execution of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23. When the flag is ON, the notification is executed. When the flag is OFF, the notification is not executed. Represents what to do. The notification execution counter 223e is a counter for counting the execution time of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23.

  The notification execution flag 223d is set to OFF as an initial value in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S810 in FIG. 21) executed when the power is turned on. The notification execution counter 223e is initialized to 0 in the initial value setting process.

  Notification execution determination processing (S1201, FIG. 26B) of notification processing (S909, see FIG. 25) executed at intervals of 1 millisecond in the main processing (see FIG. 22) by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 Thus, when it is determined that the value of the notification button on counter 223c is 1000, and it is determined that the notification button 23 has been continuously pressed for 1 second, the notification execution flag 223d is set to ON and the notification execution counter 223e is set to ON. It is initialized to 0 (see S1312, S1315 in FIG. 26B).

  The notification execution counter 223e is incremented by 1 in the notification stop determination processing (see FIG. 29A) executed in the notification processing when the notification execution flag 223d is on. As described above, since the notification process is executed at intervals of 1 millisecond, the notification execution counter 223e is incremented by 1 every 1 millisecond while the notification execution flag 223d is turned on.

  When the notification execution flag 223d is turned on, the notification execution flag 223d is turned on in the notification display setting process executed in the notification process (S1204, see FIG. 28), except when the jackpot effect or the demonstration effect is being performed. Immediately after being performed, and every second after the notification execution flag 223d is turned on (that is, when the remainder when the value of the notification execution counter 223e is divided by 1000 is 0) (see FIG. (See S1334 in FIG. 28).

  In this prefetching process, the value of the first random number counter C1 etc. stored in each area where the variation effect is suspended is prefetched among the prefetch information first to fourth areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b. Then, it is determined whether or not the variation effect is a big hit. The number of the fluctuating effects held (the number of held balls) is determined from the value of the held ball number counter 223a. In the prefetching process performed in the notification process, the values of the first random number counter C1 and the like stored in the prefetch information 0th area are also read, and it is determined whether or not the variation effect being executed is a big hit.

  When determining whether or not the variation effect being executed is a big hit, the contents of the variation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the variation effect is executed are stored and based on the contents. Determination may be performed. In this case, in the prefetch information storage area 223b, an area corresponding to the prefetch information 0th area may not be provided, and only the prefetch information first to fourth areas may be provided.

  As a result of the look-ahead process, if it is determined that there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the pending variation effects, and if the variation effect being executed is a big winner, the jackpot notification command is displayed on the display control device. 114. With this jackpot notification command, control is performed by the display control device 114 so that a jackpot notification image for notifying the presence of jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  This jackpot notification command is information indicating the number of suspensions of a variation effect that is a jackpot (holding ball that is a jackpot) when it is determined in the pre-read process that there is a variation effect that is a jackpot among the pending variation effects. including. Specifically, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the first area of the pre-read information, the variation effect with the number of suspensions “1” (that is, the first suspended among the suspended variation effects) Information) is included in the jackpot notification command. Further, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the pre-read information fourth area, the variation effect with the number of suspensions “3” (that is, the variation suspended third among the suspended variation effects). If the (effect) is a jackpot, the information is included in the jackpot notification command.

  If the number of variation productions that are held is a big hit in two or more variation productions, the information representing the number of suspensions of the variation production with the smallest number of hold times among the variation productions that are the big wins is the jackpot notification command. included. In such a case, information indicating the number of suspensions of all the changing effects that are jackpots may be included in the jackpot notification command.

  In addition, even if there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the pending variation production, if the variation production that is being executed is a big success, the jackpot notification command without including the information indicating the number of suspensions of the variation production that is a big hit Is transmitted to the display control device 114. In such a case, the jackpot notification command includes information that indicates that the running variation effect is a jackpot and information that indicates the number of suspensions of all the variation effects that are jackpots among the pending variation effects. Also good.

  While the notification execution flag 223d is on, the value of the notification execution counter 223e is determined in the notification stop determination processing (S1205, see FIG. 29A) executed in the notification processing. When it is determined that the value of the notification execution counter 223e is 5000, a notification stop command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the notification execution flag 223d is turned off. The notification stop command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to finish displaying the jackpot notification image indicating the presence of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the notification execution counter 223e is a counter that is incremented by 1 every 1 millisecond as described above, the notification execution counter 223e is based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 5 seconds after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed. The announcement ends.

  Here, with reference to Fig.9 (a), the detail of the jackpot notification image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 9A is a diagram showing a state in which the jackpot notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The jackpot notification image is displayed by changing the color of the hair HB of the boy in the image of the boy displayed in the small area Ds2 from the normal time. In other words, normally, the hair HB is displayed in black (see FIG. 4B), whereas when the jackpot notification image is displayed, the hair HB is displayed in gold. As described above, the jackpot notification image is displayed when the player has pressed the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer and includes a variation effect that is a big hit in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. It is an image to be. On the other hand, when the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer, if there is no variation effect that is a big hit in the running variation effect or the pending variation effect, the jackpot notification image is not displayed. The color of the hair HB of the boy in the region Ds2 remains black. Therefore, the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer, and confirms whether the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 remains black or changes to gold. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect and the pending variation effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the player wants to leave the game after stopping the game, or when he / she wants to finish a call such as a mobile phone call or mail, the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for 1 second or longer. By performing the operation, it is possible to know whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect being executed and the variation effect being held. Therefore, if there is no change effect that is a big hit, the player can make a determination to stop the game immediately in order to perform an action such as leaving or completing a business. Further, if there is a fluctuating effect that is a big hit, the player can make a decision to continue the game until the big hit. In other words, the notification button 23 can determine whether or not the player can immediately perform the action when he / she wants to leave the seat or complete the business.

  Further, in this embodiment, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second) by the notification button on counter 223c, the variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect being executed and the change effect being on hold. It is not announced whether there is. Unless there are special circumstances, such as when you want to stop a game and leave, or when you want to complete a call or email on your mobile phone, Knowing whether or not any of these will be a big hit before the on-hold variation effect is executed, on the contrary, the game is deprived.

  In the present embodiment, the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), and notification is made as to whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect that is being executed and the variation effect that is being held. If, for example, the player touches the notification button 23 unintentionally, and the touched time is less than the predetermined time, a jackpot is included in either the running variation effect or the pending variation effect. It is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether or not the In addition, if there is no other function that allows the player to press the button continuously for a predetermined time (1 second), the pressing operation that has continued for the predetermined time (1 second) is included in the variation effect being executed or on hold. It is possible to give the player recognition that it is for notifying whether or not there is a fluctuating effect that is a big hit. Therefore, the player can avoid confusion with the function caused by other pressing operations.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as a result of performing the pre-reading process, when it is determined that there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the pending variation effects, the variation effect that is a big hit is pending in the jackpot notification image. It is possible to notify the player which variation effect, that is, the holding ball that is a big hit. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, the reserved ball number symbol (“●” symbol) displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db is normally displayed in blue, and corresponds to the reserved ball R1 that is a big hit. The reserved ball number symbol to be displayed is displayed in red.

  As described above, in the jackpot notification command, when the prefetching process determines that there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the pending variation productions, the number of times of the variation effect that is a big hit (the holding ball that is a big hit) R1) is included. When the reserved ball R1 that is a big hit is the first held among the variation effects on hold by the information included in the jackpot notification command, the number of held balls displayed in the held ball number display area Db Among them, the retained ball number symbol displayed on the leftmost side is displayed in red, and the other retained ball number symbols are displayed in blue. When the reserved ball R1 that is a big hit is the second held effect in the on-hold variation effect, it is displayed second from the left among the number of held balls displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db. The reserved ball number symbol is displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number symbols are displayed in blue. The example shown in FIG. 9 (a) is a case where the reserved ball R1 that is a big hit is the second held effect among the variable effects on hold.

  When the reserved ball R1 that is a big hit is the third held among the variation effects on hold, it is displayed third from the left among the number of held balls displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db. The reserved ball number symbol is displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number symbols are displayed in blue. If the reserved ball R1 that is a big hit is the fourth held among the on-hold variation effects, the fourth from the left (rightmost) of the number of held balls displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db The number of reserved balls displayed on is displayed in red, and the other number of held balls is displayed in blue.

  If the jackpot notification command does not include information indicating the number of times the variable effect that is a big hit is held, this means that the variable presentation being executed is a big hit. In this case, all the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the reserved ball number display area D are displayed in blue.

  When the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer and confirms that the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 has changed to gold, the player further displays the number in the reserved ball number display area Db. By confirming which number of reserved balls from the left is displayed in red in the reserved ball number symbol to be displayed, it is possible to grasp the reserved ball that is a big hit. Also, if the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 changes to gold and all the reserved ball numbers displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db are blue, the variation effect being executed The player can be made aware that it will be a big hit.

  As a result, if the player can grasp that there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect, will it be a big hit immediately or will there be some time until the big hit? In addition, it is possible to know how many times the remaining rendition is performed until the big hit. Therefore, based on such information, the player can determine whether or not there is time to leave or finish the business before the big hit.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when two or more variable effects are a big hit among a plurality of variable effects that are reserved, the number of hold of the variable effects with the smallest number of hold times among the variable effects that are the big wins is set. Since the information to represent is included in the jackpot notification command, the number of reserved balls displayed in red in the reserved ball number display area Db is also the hold corresponding to the variable effect with the smallest number of hold times among the variable effects that are the jackpot Only the ball number symbol is displayed in red. Also, if the variation effect being executed is a big hit, even if there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the pending variation productions, the jackpot notification command is not included without including the information indicating the number of hold times of the variable effect that is a big hit Is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 is merely gold, and all the reserved ball number symbols in the reserved ball number display area Db are displayed in blue. Thereby, since the player can grasp at least the latest variation effect that is a big hit, it can be determined whether or not there is time to leave or complete the business by then.

  In the present embodiment, when the announcement button 23 is pressed for 1 second or longer, the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 changes from black to gold when the variation effect being executed is a big hit. When the notification button 23 is pressed for more than 1 second, the on-going variation effect is a big hit when the reserved ball number symbol displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db is displayed in blue. The color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 may be displayed in rainbow instead of gold. Thereby, if the color of the boy's hair HB changes to gold, the player can grasp that there is a big hit in the pending variation effect, and if the color of the boy's hair HB changes to rainbow, You can instantly grasp that the fluctuation production in the middle will be a big hit. That is, the player can easily grasp at least whether the variation effect being executed is a big hit or a big win in the pending change effect only by a change in the hair HB of the boy.

  Also, when the announcement button 23 is pressed for 1 second or longer and the variation effect being executed is a big hit, the color of the boy's hair HB is changed from black to gold, and the change variation pending is a big hit If there is a variation effect that becomes, the color of the boy's hair HB remains black, and the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the variation effect that is a big hit out of the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db is displayed. You may make it change from blue to red. As a result, if the color of the boy's hair HB changes, the variation effect being executed becomes a big hit, and if the color of the reserved ball number symbol changes, the variation effect corresponding to the reserved ball number symbol whose color changes changes to a big hit. Can be easily communicated to the player.

  As a modification of the present embodiment, when two or more variable effects are a big hit among a plurality of reserved variable effects, information indicating the number of hold times of all the variable effects that are a big hit is displayed as a jackpot notification command In addition, if the variation effect being executed is a big hit, and there is a change effect that is a big hit among the pending change effects, the information that the change effect being executed is a big hit As described above, it is possible to include information representing the number of suspensions of all the variable effects that are jackpots in the variable effect being displayed in the jackpot notification command. In such a case, the corresponding reserved ball number symbol may be displayed in red in the held ball number display area Db for all the variation effects on hold that can be recognized by the jackpot notification command. Thereby, the player can grasp once the number of suspensions of all the variation effects that are a big hit among the variation effects that have been suspended when the notification button 23 is pressed for 1 second or longer. Therefore, the player can know whether or not a big hit will be made again after a big win, and how many variable effects will be performed during the big win, so It is possible to allow the player to make a decision as to whether to leave the seat or do business at that time.

  When the announcement button 23 is pressed for 1 second or longer, the variation effect being executed is a big hit, and if there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the pending variation effects, Is included in the jackpot notification command, the information indicating the number of suspensions of all the variable effects that will be a big hit among the variable effects that are on hold is included in the jackpot notification command. The number of reserved balls corresponding to all the changing effects that are changed and the jackpot may be displayed in red in the reserved ball number display area Db. Thereby, it is possible to allow the player to grasp at a time that the variation effect being executed is a jackpot and the number of suspensions of all the variation effects that are jackpots among the suspended variation effects.

  In addition, whether or not the jackpot of the fluctuating effect being executed is displayed for the hair HB of the boy, and whether or not the jackpot of the fluctuating effect corresponding to the number of holding times corresponding to each held symbol displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db is displayed. May be displayed. In other words, when the variation effect being executed is a big hit and there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the pending variation effects, the boy's hair HB and the reserved ball corresponding to the pending variation effect that is a big hit If you change the color in several designs, the variation effect being executed is not a big hit, and if there is a change effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variation production, without changing the color of the boy's hair HB, The color may be changed only for the number of reserved balls corresponding to all the on-hold variation effects that are jackpots. Thereby, it is possible to convey to the player the change effect that is a big hit more easily.

  In addition, when there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the pending variation production, as a method of notifying the player of the reserved ball that is a big hit, among the retained ball number symbols displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db The method is not limited to the method of changing the color of the reserved ball number design to be performed, and the corresponding reserved ball number design may be blinked or the shape may be changed from a circle to a square. Moreover, you may display the effect which points to a corresponding number-of-holding number symbols by the character etc. which are displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. In addition, the number of times of the holding ball that is a big hit may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or may be displayed by a lamp or the like provided separately from the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description of the RAM 223 is continued. The ball non-detection counter 223f is a counter for counting a time during which no balls are entered into the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the specific winning port 65a, and the out port 66. The ball launching stop flag 223g is a flag that indicates that the ball launching of the ball launching unit 112a that launches the ball toward the game area of the game board 13 is stopped. It indicates that the ball is stopped, and when it is off, it indicates that a ball is being launched. The ball non-detection counter 223f and the ball launch stop flag 223g are set to “0” and “off” as initial values, respectively, in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S810 in FIG. 21) executed when the power is turned on.

  The ball non-detection counter 223f includes a general winning hole 63, a first winning hole 64, and a specific winning hole 65a in the ball launch stop determination process (S1203, see FIG. 27) of the notification process executed every millisecond. When it is determined from the output signals of the various switches 208 provided at the respective mouths that there is no entry into the out mouth 66 (S1323), the ball launch stop flag 223g is off (that is, the ball is launched). Is incremented by 1 (S1327). Thus, in a state in which it is determined that the ball has not been stopped, the time when there is no ball entering the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the specific winning port 65a, and the out port 66, The undetected counter 223f can count every 1 millisecond.

  Here, the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the specific winning port 65a, and the out port 66 are ports provided in the game area of the game board 13 as described above with reference to FIG. Also, the ball guided to the game area by the ball launch unit 112a is an outlet through which the ball is discharged out of the game area. These are all the outlets from which the balls are discharged out of the game area. That is, when there is no ball entering these mouths for a predetermined time, it indicates that the ball is not launched into the game area by the ball launch unit 112a.

  In the present embodiment, in the ball launch stop determination process, the ball non-detection counter 223f is 5000 or more (that is, the ball enters the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the specific winning port 65a, and the out port 66). If it is determined that the ball has not been detected for more than 5 seconds), the ball launching stop flag 223g is set on, assuming that the ball launching by the ball launching unit 112a has been stopped. Further, when it is determined from the output signals of the various switches 208 that the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 have been entered, the ball launch stop flag 223g is set. It is set to OFF, and the sphere non-detection counter 223f is initialized to 0. By initializing the ball non-detection counter 223f to 0, it is possible to again count the time during which no ball is detected at the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the specific winning port 65a, and the out port 66. Yes.

  In this embodiment, the output signals of the various switches 208 are input not only to the main control device 110 but also to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 receives the general prize based on the output signals from the various switches 208. The presence / absence of entering the entrance 63, the first entrance 64, the specific winning entrance 65a, and the out entrance 66 was determined. Instead, when the main control device 110 detects the entry to the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 based on the output signals of the various switches 208, A ball entry detection command to be notified is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 determines whether or not the general winning a prize opening 63, the first game input, based on whether or not the ball entry detection command is received. The presence / absence of a ball entering the ball port 64, the specific winning port 65a, and the out port 66 may be determined.

  The ball launch stop flag 223g is referred to in the notification display setting process (S11204, see FIG. 28) executed in the notification process. Specifically, as a result of the look-ahead process executed in the notification display setting process, it is determined that there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the pending variation effects, or that the variation effect being executed is a big hit. When the jackpot notification command for displaying the jackpot notification image on the third symbol display device 81 is set, the ball launch stop flag 223g is referred to (S1337). If the ball launch stop flag 223g is ON, the variation time of each variation effect until the most recent variation effect is calculated, and the variation time notification for notifying each calculated variation time to the display control device 114 is calculated. A command is set (S1340).

  Note that, for the variation effect being executed, the remaining variation time (the remaining variation time from the point in time until the variation effect ends) is calculated. For the variable effects on hold, the variable time is calculated for each variable effect. The calculation is performed up to the variation effect that has been determined to be the biggest jackpot most recently by the pre-reading process, and when the variation effect being executed becomes a jackpot, only the remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed is calculated. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 3, and the variation effect that is secondly held among the variation effects that are on hold becomes the big hit most recently, the remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed and the first The variation time of each variation effect held second is calculated. That is, in this case, the variation time of the variation effect that is reserved third is not calculated.

  The remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed is changed from the variation time determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern command. The time is calculated by subtracting the elapsed time from the start of the variation effect being executed. Note that the variation time of the variation effect being executed may be determined from the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch information 0th area of the prefetch information storage area 223b.

  The variation times of the pending variation effects are calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch information first to fourth areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b. In the present embodiment, the variation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed). Therefore, when calculating each variation time of the pending variation effect, based on the value of the retained ball number counter 223a at the time of calculation, the number of reserved balls when the execution of each pending variation effect is started. This is done after calculating how many are.

  For example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a when calculating each variation time of the variation effect on hold is “2”, the number of reserved balls when the variation effect corresponding to the pre-read information first area is executed. Is “1”, and the number of reserved balls when the variation effect corresponding to the pre-read information second area is executed is “0”. In addition, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a when calculating each variation time of the variation effect on hold is “4”, the number of reserved balls when the variation effect corresponding to the pre-read information first area is executed. Becomes “3”, the number of reserved balls when the variation effect corresponding to the pre-reading information second area is executed is “2”, and the number of reserved balls when the variation effect corresponding to the pre-reading information third area is executed Becomes “1”, and the number of reserved balls when the variation effect corresponding to the pre-read information fourth area is executed is “0”.

  In addition, when calculating each variation time of the variation effect that is on hold, the number of reserved balls when the execution of each variation effect on hold is started can be determined when the calculation is performed. This is because the launching of the ball to is stopped. That is, when calculating each variation time of the variation effect on hold, there is no possibility of winning at the first entrance 64, so the number of retained balls does not change. Therefore, even when the variation time is determined according to the number of balls held at the time when the execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the jackpot lottery is performed), each variation of the variation effect on hold is determined. The time can be calculated reliably.

  As described above, the change time notification command calculates the remaining change time of the change effect being executed and each change time of the change effect on hold, which is calculated for the change effect until the last big win. 114 is a command for notifying to 114. When the change time notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the change time notification image for notifying the player of each change time notified by the change time notification command is displayed as the above jackpot notification image (the change effect currently being executed or Control is performed by the display control device 114 so as to display it on the third symbol display device 81 together with an image for notifying that there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the pending variation effect.

  Here, with reference to FIG.9 (b), the detail of the change time notification image displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a state in which a variation effect notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the change time notification image is displayed in the small area Ds3 in accordance with the big hit notification image displayed in the small area Ds2 and the reserved ball number display area Db. In the variable time notification image, the character string “Remaining in progress” is displayed as a character string to indicate the remaining variable time calculated for the variable effect being executed, and the variable time notification command is displayed on the right side of the character string. The notified remaining fluctuation time (“5 seconds” in the example of FIG. 9B) is displayed.

  In the variable time notification image, the character strings “Hold 1”, “Hold 2”, “Hold 3”, and “Hold 4” are displayed in order from the top below the character string “Remaining in execution”. “Hold 1” is a character string for indicating the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation production that is held first. On the right side of “Hold 1”, the first fluctuation that has been notified by the variable time notification command. The effect variation time (“30 seconds” in the example of FIG. 9B) is displayed. “Hold 2” is a character string for indicating the variation time of the variation effect that is secondly suspended, and the second variation that has been notified by the variable time notification command to the right of “Hold 2”. The effect variation time (“90 seconds” in the example of FIG. 9B) is displayed. “Hold 3” and “Hold 4” are character strings for indicating the variation times of the third and fourth variation effects, respectively, and are notified to the right of each character string by a variation time notification command. The variation time of the corresponding variation effect is displayed.

  In addition, the change time notification command notifies each change time of the change effect until the last big hit, not only about the change effect that is not on hold, but also on the change effect that is on hold. With regard to the variation effect that is executed after the variation effect that is a big hit, the variation time is not notified by the variation time notification command. For a variation effect in which the variation time is not notified by the variation time notification command, “-” is displayed instead of the variation time on the right side of the corresponding character string of “hold 1” to “hold 4”.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 9B, since the number of reserved balls is 3, there is no variation effect corresponding to “hold 4” (the fourth variation effect that is reserved), and therefore “−” is displayed. ing. In addition, since the reserved ball number symbol displayed secondly from the left among the reserved ball numbers displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db is displayed in red, it is the latest in the variation effect that is held second. Since it is a big hit, the variation time of the variation effect that is held third is not notified by the variation time notification command. For this reason, “-” is also displayed on the right side of “hold 3”. If the variation effect being executed is a big hit, the variation time of all pending variation effects is not included in the variation time notification command. Therefore, in this case, “-” is displayed on the right side of all of “Hold 1” to “Hold 4”.

  The jackpot notification displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player presses the notification button 23 for one second or longer and there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or the variation effect being held. By displaying a variation time notification image as shown in FIG. 9B together with the image, the player not only knows whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit, It is possible to grasp the time to become. Therefore, the player can immediately determine whether or not there is time to leave or finish the business in consideration of the time until the last big hit.

  In addition, since the variation time (remaining variation time in the variation effect being executed) is displayed for each variation effect until the last big hit, the player can determine which variation effect is being executed. You can also decide whether you want to leave the office or do business.

  In the present embodiment, each variation time in the variation effect until the last big hit is displayed, whereas the variation time of the variation effect to be executed after that is not displayed (“−” is displayed). ) This makes it possible for the player to easily understand the time until the last big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time notification image is displayed in accordance with the jackpot notification image only when it is determined that the ball has been launched into the game area. This is because, as described above, there is no possibility of winning in the first entrance 64 when calculating each variation time of the variation effect on hold, so the number of reserved balls does not change. Even if the variation time is determined according to the number of held balls at the time when the execution of the effect starts (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed) This is because it can be calculated as follows. Conversely, in this embodiment, unless it is determined that the ball has been launched into the game area, the variable time notification image is not displayed together with the jackpot notification image. Therefore, since the launch of the ball to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to suppress the display of the inaccurate variation time with respect to the variation effect that is on hold, so that the player can leave the seat and do business It is possible to suppress erroneous determination of whether there is time.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description of the RAM 223 is continued. The notification button invalid flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is in an invalid period. When the notification button is invalid, the invalid button 223h indicates the invalid period. Indicates that the pressing operation is valid. The confirmed command flag 223i is a flag indicating that a confirmed command has been received from the main controller 110. When the confirmed command flag 223i is on, it indicates that a confirmed command has been received, and when it is off, it indicates that it has not been received.

  Here, the confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81, and the variation display executed on the first symbol display device 37 in the main control device 110 is confirmed. Along with the display, the data is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  The notification button invalid flag 223h and the confirmation command flag 223i are set to “off” as initial values in the initial value setting process of the RAM 223 (see S810 in FIG. 21) executed when the power is turned on. Then, in the notification execution determination processing (S1202, see FIG. 26B) of the notification processing, when the notification button on counter 223c becomes 1000, that is, it is determined that the notification button 23 has been pressed by the player for one second or longer. In this case, the notification execution flag 223d is set to ON to start notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, and the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to ON. While the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to ON, the value of the notification button on counter 223c remains in the notification button determination process (S1201, see FIG. 26A) regardless of whether or not the notification button 23 is pressed. It continues to be initialized to zero. Thereby, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated.

  On the other hand, the confirmed command flag 223i is set to ON when a confirmed command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1011 in FIG. 23). The confirmed command flag 223i is referred to in the notification button invalid release processing (S1206, see FIG. 29B) of the notification processing. Specifically, when the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to ON and the confirmed command flag 223i is turned on, the confirmed command flag 223i is turned off and the hold count counter 223a at that time is 0. It is determined whether or not there is a hold number counter 223a, and if the notice count invalid flag 223h is set to OFF.

  If the confirmed command flag 223i is on, that is, if the number-of-holds counter 223a is 0 when the confirmed command is received from the main control device 110, it means that all of the variable effects including the reserved portion have been executed and are on hold. This means that the fluctuation production of has become zero. In other words, in the present embodiment, after the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is set to invalid, all of the variable effects including the reserved amount (including the variable effects held after the invalid setting is made) are included. When the execution is finished and there is no pending variation effect, the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to OFF, and the invalidation of the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is released.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated until the pending variation effect becomes zero. That is, even if the notification button 23 is pressed during that period, the notification is not executed. Thus, according to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, for example, when a player leaves the gaming machine, even if a person other than the player presses the notification button 23, at least the pachinko machine In FIG. 10, it is possible to make it impossible for a person other than the player to know whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit until the pending variation effect becomes zero. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another player from gaining the jackpot profit obtained by the fluctuating effect held by the game of the person who originally played the game, and to protect the profit of the person who originally played the game. . Also, if the variation effect on hold is 0, it is considered that all the variation effects that have been reserved by the game of the person who originally played the game have been executed once. By pressing the button for 1 second or longer, a notification based on the pressing operation can be obtained.

  The RAM 223, in addition, a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, or that the variable effect should be started in the on state. And a variation start flag (not shown) indicating.

  The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 23) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 23). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 24).

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 produces a variation effect or a continuous effect. Controls the notice effect. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. Yes.

  The voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input port 238, and the display control device 114 sends a command for instructing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 to the voice lamp control device 113. Receive from. The MPU 231, program ROM 232, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 are also connected to the input port 238 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The program ROM 232 includes at least a display data table storage area 232a and an additional data table storage area 232b.

  The display data table storage area 232a is an area in which a display data table prepared for each effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110 is stored. The display data table describes display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses in an effect corresponding to the display data table. The MPU 231 determines an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, reads a display data table corresponding to the effect from the display data table storage area 232a, and reads the read display. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled according to the data table.

  Here, details of the display data table will be described. The display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the sound lamp control device 113. Display data tables corresponding to the confirmed display effect and the restart effect are prepared.

  The demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start prize is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the stop symbol is confirmed and received by receiving a confirmed command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 after the variation effect. It is an effect that is displayed. For example, when the stop symbol is an out symbol, an effect of emphasizing the loss is performed, and when the stop symbol is either 15R probability big jackpot, 15R normal jackpot or 2R probability big jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. Production is performed. The player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol by visually recognizing the final display effect.

  The restart effect is when the fixed command transmitted from the main controller 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. This is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image obtained by vibrating (swinging) the third symbol around a predetermined position. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stop symbol is not fixed at that time. Can be recognized.

  In the display data table storage area 232a, one display data table corresponding to each of the demonstration effect and the restart effect is stored. A display data table for variation, which is a display data table for variation effect, is prepared for each table according to the combination of the variation effect pattern and the stop symbol set. In addition, as the display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect, the display of the out symbol as the stop symbol is confirmed, the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot) is confirmed and displayed, and the normal jackpot (15R normal) Each of them is provided with a decisive display.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for change in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as people and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is fixed, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the display data table for change. This back surface type is any of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage (any one of “town stage”, “sea stage”, “mountain stage”) selected by the player operating the frame button 22. Or the information specifying whether to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C. The back surface type also includes information specifying which back image to display when specifying that a back image different from the back surfaces A to C is displayed.

  The MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target when the back surface type specifies that any of the back surfaces A to C is displayed. . On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is defined as the back image rendering content in the display data table will be described. You may make it prescribe | regulate the display status information which shows whether a back image should be displayed. The rear image is displayed with the display range, brightness, color, etc. changed with the passage of time. This display state information may be information indicating an elapsed time after the rear image in the initial state is displayed, for example. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the display of the back image in the initial state indicated by the display state information.

  The display state information is information indicating an elapsed time from the start of drawing an image based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). May be. In this case, the MPU 231 starts drawing the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the display data table (or displaying the image based on the display data table on the third symbol display device 81). Based on the state of the back image displayed in the stage and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the display state information (or display of the image on the third symbol display device 81) is started. Identify.

  Further, the display state information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image corresponding to the initial state is displayed and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the image based on the display data table depending on the rear surface type). It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the display on the 3rd symbol display device 81 is started, and the type information ( For example, it is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed, or the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 for the image based on the display data table). Information indicating whether it is information indicating the elapsed time since the start of display) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the display state information may be information indicating an address at which a back image to be displayed is stored instead of information indicating elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), A unique identification number assigned to the third symbol is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. In this embodiment, a unique identification number for identifying each of the third symbols is attached to each of the third symbols. For example, “0” is assigned to the main symbol “0”, “1” is assigned to the main symbol “1”, and “1” is assigned to the main symbol “2”. 2 "is attached.

  However, as the symbol type information of the third symbol from when the variation starts until the predetermined time elapses, the identification information of the third symbol is not directly defined, but the variation effect performed immediately before is stopped. The offset information with the symbol identification number is described. This offset information is information representing the difference between the identification numbers assigned to the third symbols.

  The offset information is specified as the symbol type information of the third symbol until the predetermined time elapses after the change is started. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the display of the variation effect performed immediately before. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol. Until the elapse of a predetermined time from the start of the change, as the symbol type information at each address, the identification information of the third symbol to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address and the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before The difference (offset information) from the identification information is described. Thereby, the variation effect can be started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation time, the symbol type information at each address is stopped at the third symbol identification information to be displayed at the time corresponding to that address and the variation effect currently being performed. The difference (offset information) from the displayed third symbol (stop symbol) is described. Thereby, the variation effect can be executed so that the third symbol stops at the stop symbol set for the current variation effect.

  As the symbol type information, the timing for switching from the offset information from the previous stop effect of the variation effect to the offset information of the stop effect of the variation effect currently performed is displayed at high speed in the third symbol. The predetermined time is set such that the predetermined time is reached. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the display data table, and the data table is stored in the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 11). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the display data table storage area 232a, stored in a display data table buffer 233a (to be described later) provided in the work RAM 233, and the pointer 233c is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233c is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c, The contents of the image to be drawn are specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 13) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table in accordance with the update of the pointer 233c, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233a. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Returning to FIG. The additional data table storage area 232b adds the display contents of the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for one effect based on the command from the main control device 110, and additional data prepared for each effect. This is the area where the table is stored. Here, “adding to one effect” means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, an image that is not normally displayed in one effect is displayed. The concept of displaying and changing another effect on the one effect, changing part or all of the color tone of the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect. Is included.

  That is, the additional data table is a drawing content necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110. Also, the drawing content required to change part or all of the color tone in the one production, and the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in the one production are predetermined. It is. The additional data table is prepared, for example, corresponding to a continuous notice effect mode (continuous notice mode) additionally set for the variable effect, and is stored in the additional data table storage area 232b.

  Details of the additional data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the additional data table. In the additional data table, the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is defined in detail in association with the address defined in the display data table. In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object to be additionally displayed in an image for one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 12, a sprite for specifying a sprite (character) to be additionally displayed for one character (character 1) in association with the address “0097H” defined in the display data table. The type (character type), display position, magnification, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are defined. On the other hand, if there is no display object to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, this means that there is no display object to be added corresponding to that address in the additional data table. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address “0001H” in FIG. 12).

  Note that “0000H”, which is the top address of the additional data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 12, “00FDH”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the rendering content corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the additional data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 receives the continuous notice command from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 reads an additional data table corresponding to the continuous notice mode indicated by the continuous notice command from the additional data table storage area 232b, and adds additional data in the work RAM 233 described later. Store in the table buffer 233b. Then, every time the pointer 233c is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c is displayed from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. The image content to be drawn next is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 13) described later is created.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 12, when the pointer 233c becomes “0097H”, the MPU 231 is specified by the address “0097H” of the additional data table to the various sprites specified by the address “0097H” of the display data table. The drawing list is created by adding the sprite of the character 1 and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233c is “0001H”, Null data is defined at the address “0001H” of the additional data table, so it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and the address “ A drawing list is generated based on various sprites defined in “0001H”. When the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional data table is “End” information, or when the pointer 233c indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example, In the example of FIG. 12, it is determined that there is no display object to be added even when the pointer 233c indicates an address after “00FEH”, and drawing is performed based on various sprites defined in the display data table. Generate a list.

  Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. Thereby, according to the update of the pointer 233c, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table An image as defined is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 should display the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. In addition to the effect image (for example, the variable effect image), when displaying another effect image (for example, the continuous notice effect image), an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image to be displayed is added. By setting the data table buffer 233b, the effect image can be easily added to the base effect image and displayed. Thereby, for example, in the case where there are 32 types of original effect images and there are five types of other effect images to be displayed additionally, a display that prescribes an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image If a data table is prepared separately, 32 × (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared. As in this pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to another effect image is used as an additional data table. By defining separately, 32 + 5 = 37 types of display and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in capacity of the display data table storage area 232a and the additional data table storage area 232b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store data tables corresponding to various types of effects in the capacity prepared in the display data table storage area 232a and the additional data table storage area 232b, and it is easy to further diversify the effect images. Can be aimed at.

  Moreover, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233a by prescribing other effect images to be additionally displayed as the additional data table as in the pachinko machine 10, Even when display of other effect images to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to another effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. By simply setting in the data table buffer 233b, other effect images to be added and displayed can be easily added to the original effect image and displayed.

  In addition, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233b. While updating the pointer 233c for each time from the table, it is possible to easily specify the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer, and easily draw one drawing list corresponding to one frame from these. Can be generated. Therefore, in addition to the effect performed based on the command from the main control device 110, even if the display of other effects is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 or the like, the effect to be displayed additionally is displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of presentations from a small number of data tables.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. The work RAM 233 has at least a display data table buffer 233a, an additional data table buffer 223b, a pointer 233c, a drawing list area 233d, and a time counter 233e.

  The display data table buffer 233a stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode in the display data table storage area 232a. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233c one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. A drawing list (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, describing the contents of the image drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays effects corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a.

  The additional data table buffer 233b is displayed in addition to the effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a in response to a command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to the effect image. As the MPU 231 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 233a, the MPU 231 once writes Null data indicating that there is no display object to be added and displayed in the additional data table buffer 233b. Clear the contents.

  Thereafter, the MPU 231 performs an effect to be displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a based on the command from the sound lamp control device 113 or the like. When there is an effect to be determined and added and displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the additional data table storage area 232b, and the selected additional data table is added to the additional data table buffer 233b. To store.

  Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233c one by one, and stores the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. In the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 13) to be described later describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 is generated for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c. . As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the additional data table in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. If no additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, null data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as it is.

  The pointer 233c is for designating an address from which the corresponding drawing contents are to be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233c to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233a. In the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from the image controller 237 completing the drawing process of one frame of image, the pointer The update process is executed (see S1911 in FIG. 35, FIG. 39), and the value of the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 (see S1981 in FIG. 39).

  The MPU 231 updates the address indicated by the pointer 233c each time the pointer 233c is updated, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. A drawing list (see FIG. 13), which will be described later, is created by specifying the drawing contents defined in (1).

  Thereby, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the presentation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. . Therefore, a variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341.

  The drawing list area 233d is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 13, the back image used for the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 1). Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,... For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite describes the address where the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored. The image controller 237 is a character described later provided in the character ROM 234. The image data of the sprite is acquired from the memory area designated by the address of the storage area 234a. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the ROM 234 is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value Processed, combined with other sprites according to the α blending information, color tone corrected according to the color information, and filtered according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information Above, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed in the video RAM 236 by the image controller 237.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, the MPU 231 draws the contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c and other images to be drawn. 1 (for example, a hold image for displaying the number of held balls, a warning image for notifying the occurrence of an error, a jackpot notification image or a variable time notification image displayed based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, etc.) Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for a frame is generated, and a drawing list is created by rearranging the detailed information for each sprite.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage address of the data of the sprite (display object) is the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the character storage area 234a where the image data of the sprite is stored is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 immediately determines the address where the image data of the sprite is stored according to the sprite type. And the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  The MPU 231 also displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. The information specified in the table is copied as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first is arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last is arranged on the most front side.

  Returning to FIG. 10, the description will be continued. The time counter 233e is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233a. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 30 (c) ))), The time counter 233e is decremented by one each time the display setting process (S1603, see FIG. 35) is executed. As a result, when the value of the time counter 233e becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The character ROM 235 includes a character storage area 235a in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area 235a, in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored, the above-described image data is stored as compressed data. In the present embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 Mbytes, and the image data of about 1024 Mbytes is compressed to about 768 Mbytes and stored in the character storage area 235a.

  The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frame buffer areas for storing an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list, writes the image data in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. And the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, whereby a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The image controller 237 reads the sprite image data (compressed image data) specified by the drawing list from the character storage area 235a in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, decompresses the image data, and draws the image data. Processing is performed in accordance with the drawing information defined in the list, and the image data of the sprite is written into one frame buffer area of the video RAM at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. Image data to be displayed in one frame is generated by decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites defined in the drawing list.

  The writing of the image data for one frame to the one frame buffer area and the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, and both are completed in 20 milliseconds. When the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written from one frame buffer area is then read, while the other The next one frame of image data is written into the frame buffer area.

  In this manner, by alternately writing image data and reading image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be displayed.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 20. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, and the like is generated based on various processes, and is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

  For example, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 15) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 16) or the fluctuation start process (FIG. 17) which is one of the fluctuation processes are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when launching the ball in the processing of S111 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of the big win state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed for this purpose (S103). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning opening 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 is obtained. The variation display of the second symbol is performed at. Then, the lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4. When the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the first entrance 64 is released for a predetermined time.

  Next, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S106). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop-type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values. (In this embodiment, when reaching 899, 99, 99, 198, and 250, respectively), each is cleared to 0. Further, when the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the first per-random number counter C1 or The initial value of the second per-random number counter C2 is read, and the initial value is set in the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for performing display by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first entrance port. A start winning process associated with winning 64 is executed (S110). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 16, and details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Next, the start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). In the starting winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) at the first entrance 64, and if there is a starting winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the holding ball storage area 203b. Execute (hold) processing. Further, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of balls to be held to the sound lamp controller 113 is executed.

  When executing the start winning process, the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won (started winning) in the first entrance 64 (S201). Here, based on the output signal of the first entrance switch (not shown) that detects the entrance (winning) to the first entrance 64 read in the switch reading process (S106 in FIG. 14), A ball entering the first ball inlet 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes.

  If it is determined that the ball has won the first entrance 64 (there is a start winning) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (the holding of the variable effect held in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number N of balls is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S202). Then, there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (S201: No), or even if there is a winning at the first entrance 64, if the number N of operation reservation balls is not N <4 (S202: No) Return to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first entrance 64 (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) is set. 1 is added (S203). Then, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first to fourth areas, the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per-type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter 203b3, and the area corresponding to the value indicated by the retained ball number counter 203a, Each change type is stored (stored) in the counter storage area 203b4 (S204).

  Specifically, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the hold first area. Further, if the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “2”, each storage area of the reserved second area is stored. If the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “3”, the retained third area If the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “4” in each storage area, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are retained in each storage area of the retained fourth area.

  Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) after the addition in the process of S203, the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S204, A command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203 for transmitting the reserved ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113. The buffer is set (S205). Thereby, the reserved ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. When the process of S205 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be included in the reserved ball number command in the process of S205 may be the values read from the counter buffer by the process of S204, or the reserved ball storage area in the process of S204. You may use what read the value stored (suspended) in 203b.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the fluctuation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interruption process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). The variation process (S109) controls variation display on the first symbol display device 37 and variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S303: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N of the variable display held in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not is larger than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, and first, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the held ball number) 1 is subtracted from the number N of balls (S305). This is because the number of reserved balls decreases by one because the execution of one variation effect among the variation effects that have been suspended is started by the variation start process (S307).

  Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted, such as area 203c, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area.

  After the data shift process of S306, the fluctuation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the holding ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is 0 (S304: No), the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where a demonstration effect is being performed. It is determined whether or not a demonstration is in progress (S308). In this determination process, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is determined to be greater than zero. It is determined that the interval is being demonstrated.

  If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S309: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S101 in FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113.

  When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the demonstration command, it transmits the display demonstration command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 performs the demonstration to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demonstration command. Control is performed to display the effect.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the change display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the change, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after stopping the fluctuation is further performed. When the second predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the change and stopping, the process of S309 may be executed to set the demo command. As a result, when there is no reserved ball after the change stop, the stop effect of the stop change effect can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration effect.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the change time has passed (S310). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S310: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S311), and it returns to a timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  Although the variation process is executed every 4 milliseconds, if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S306, and if the big hit, the first hit type counter C2 Depending on the value of the value, it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds will be a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a big round of 15 rounds) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (the maximum number of rounds will be a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds) It is determined whether the symbol will be a transition jackpot or a symbol that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, a blue LED is lit when the 15R probability variable big hit is reached after the big hit, a red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variable big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED are turned on when the 15R normal big hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the change display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display confirmation command, and to confirm the stop symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the change start process (S307), which is one process of the change process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S307). This variation start process (S307) performs lottery (big hit lottery) of “big hit” or “out” based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and the first symbol display device 37. And the production pattern (fluctuation pattern) etc. of the fluctuating effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined.

  In the variation start process, first, the jackpot for determining whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 7B). A lottery (win / no decision) process is performed (S401).

  Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low probability state, “7,307,582” is defined as the jackpot random number value. Further, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is a high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420 , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are defined as jackpot random numbers.

  In the process of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and they match. In the case, it is determined that the jackpot. As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that the game is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big hit type table 202b (FIG. 7B) Display mode is set based on (see S402).

  In this process, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c, that is, the high probability state after the jackpot of the maximum round number of 15 rounds by the jackpot type table 202b. 15R probable big jackpot that makes a transition to 15R, a big round 15R jackpot that hits a low probability state after 15 rounds, or a 2R probable big jackpot that makes the maximum number of rounds go to a high probability state after a big round of two rounds Determined. Based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is. The display mode at the time of big hit in the 3 symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the variation time until the display is stopped in the display mode at the time of big hit is determined. In the determination of the variation pattern at the time of jackpot, first, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 7C) to be used is selected according to the number of balls held at that time indicated by the retained ball counter 203a. If the 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, it is stored in the holding ball execution area 203c in the “15R jackpot common” group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, any one of the variation A, the variation B, and the variation C is selected.

  If 2R probability variation jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “2R probability variation jackpot dedicated” group of the selected variation pattern table 202d1 for jackpot A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. In this embodiment, in this case, only the 2R variation is selected. The relationship between the variation pattern (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnect is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third mode is set based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As a stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, one of front / rear detach reach, reach other than front / rear detach, and complete detach is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state. The tables are set differently.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the variation time until stop display with the off symbol is determined. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low probability state excluding the short-time state, a variation pattern table for detachment (normal) corresponding to the number of held balls at that time indicated by the held ball number counter 203a. 202d2 (see FIG. 7D) is selected. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (corresponding to the number of balls held at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a) (See FIG. 7E).

  Then, when complete outage is set as the stop type in the process of S404, in the “completely exclusive” group of the selected out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, there is a hold. A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the sphere execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, the variation D or the variation E is selected.

  In addition, when the front / rear out of reach and the reach other than out of front / rear are set as the stop type in the process of S402, “reach common” of the selected out (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 or out (probability) fluctuation pattern table 202d3. In this group, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation A, variation B, and variation C are selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the process of S406, based on the change pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S406). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S404 via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S415), and the process returns to the variation processing. These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based on the command and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604). If it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S611 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S611.

  Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S706 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S612, S613) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S612, S613) is executed. Similarly, the initialization processing (S612, S613) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S612, S613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S612), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S613). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S610, an interrupt is permitted (S610). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed roughly.

  In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S701: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 14) (S703), and the process proceeds to the process of S701.

  Here, while the main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 14 is started and executed at a predetermined time interval (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the game state. For example, during the jackpot, the execution of controlling the opening / closing of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. If there is a passage of a ball to the second winning opening 67, the second symbol display device 83 controls the display of the second symbol. Done. In the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random number values to be compared with the acquired first hit random number counter C1 depending on whether the probability state is high or low. Will be different. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the game state. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, and changes according to the game state at that time.

  The processes of S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, so the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. . In particular, by updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at random, the first per-random number counter C1 and the second per-random number counter C2 that use these as initial values for updating are updated. Can be given randomness.

  In the processing of S701, if the occurrence information of the power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 18 has been executed, the power-off process after S704 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S705). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processing of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing ends. Thereby, in the main process of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt process are completed, and the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized.

  Therefore, in the process at power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S701. As a result, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which processing to be executed periodically is executed by timer interrupt processing, and updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is performed in the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing in the main processing. You may comprise so that a part or all of the process currently performed by the timer interruption process may be performed every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) in a main process. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the large opening opening / closing process (S103), the second symbol control process (S105), and the switch reading which were executed in the timer interruption process in this embodiment. A part or all of the process (S106) may be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

  In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has elapsed in the main process is provided, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a process to be executed every predetermined time is executed. The updating of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be performed regardless of whether a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed during the remaining time of the process executed every predetermined time, but the process executed every predetermined time is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the above changes, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is activated when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is on, the power-off process of S915 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 22). ) Is determined during execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 22, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S912 in FIG. 22), it executes a power-off process in S915. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S915 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S915 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S915, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S802: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S915, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S806). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in the specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S915 is executed (see S914 in FIG. 22). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S915 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S915 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S808 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S808 through S804 to S806 is performed. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), S809, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and interrupt permission is set. In step S811, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process in S809 is that if the process from S804 to S808 is reached via the process in S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S804. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous execution of the process of S901 (S901), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S901: No). , The process proceeds to S910 without performing the processes in S902 to S909. In the process of S901, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed. In contrast to the fact that S902 to S909 do not need to be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), the variable display process of S910 This is because the command determination process in step S911 is preferably performed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S911 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S910 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  In the process of S901, when it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S901 was executed (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to S902. If the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 21, the process proceeds to S902 as it is.

  In the process of S902, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S902). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S906 described later are set (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  Next, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S905). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed variation period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation of the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S905 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (S905) ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S906), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S907, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process in S906 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process in S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. Executed in time.

  Next, notification processing is executed (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. The notification process is based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 by the player, and if there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or the variation effect being held, the jackpot notification image is notified to that effect. This is processing for executing control to be displayed on the three-symbol display device 81. Details of the notification process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the process of S910, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S911). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S912). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S914), and the power interruption processing is executed (S915). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S916), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S911). This command determination processing (S911) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. Is determined (S1001). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern in the variation display processing (see FIG. 24) described later. Used when setting.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1003). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main process. .

  The stop type command indicates the stop type of the variation effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command when the variation effect is started. This command is always transmitted from 110. By setting the variation start flag to ON by the processing of S1005, in the variation display processing executed later, based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command received earlier and the stop type extracted from the stop type command Then, a process for generating a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of these variation patterns and stop types, and transmitting them to the display control device 114 is executed.

  If it is determined that the stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1003 (S1003: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1006). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the held ball number command (that is, the hold of the suspended variation effect). The number of balls) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1007).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning), so that every time there is a starting win, the processing of S1007 is performed. The value of the held ball number counter 223a of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the held ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, when the start winning is detected, the voice lamp control device 113 The value of the held ball number counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  Next, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received reserved ball number command are extracted, and the pre-read information in the pre-read information storage area 223b Of the first to fourth areas (see FIG. 8), the area is stored in an area corresponding to the number of reserved balls extracted from the reserved ball number command by the processing of S1007 (S1008). That is, when the number of reserved balls is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), each value of the extracted first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 Are stored in the first per random number counter storage area 223b1, the first per type counter storage area 223b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223b3, and the variation type counter storage area 223b4 in the prefetch information Xth area.

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the held ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first entrance 64 (start winning). When the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X, the value stored in the reserved X area of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110. That is, the same information (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main control device 110 is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b of the sound lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetch process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b. That is, when the suspended variation effect is executed, the result of the variation effect will be determined (whether it will be a big hit, the change time, etc.) before executing the variation effect, When execution of various effects is decided, or when the notification button 23 is pressed, it is notified whether there is a change effect that is a big hit among the change effect being executed and the change effect being held. The control can be executed by an audio lamp control process.

  Next, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the value of the held ball number counter 223a updated by the process of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main process. The display reserved ball number command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, a process is performed so that the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 may display the number of reserved balls according to the number of reserved balls.

  As a result of the processing of S1006, when it is determined that a pending ball number command has not been received (S1006: No), it is then determined whether or not a confirmed command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), first, the confirmation command flag 223i is set to ON (S1011). The confirmed command flag 223i is referred to in a notification button invalid release process (S1206, see FIG. 29B) in a notification process (S909) described later.

  Next, a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of reception of the confirmation command is set (S1012), and the process returns to the main process. The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. The display control device 114 receives the display confirmation command to stop the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81, and corresponds to the stop type previously indicated by the display stop type command. By displaying the stop symbol, the display is confirmed.

  If it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1010 (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. (S1013), the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command by the processing of S1013, temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then command output processing of the main processing (S902). ) To the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the fluctuation display process (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this variation display process (S910).

  This variation display process (S910) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. To generate a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, and to send these commands to the display control device 114. It is processing to do. In the variable display process, a shift process of data in the prefetch information storage area 223b is executed.

  In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1101: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so this fluctuation display processing is performed. End and return to the main process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1102), and then the prefetch information first to fourth areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are set. The contained data is shifted to the pre-read information 0th to 3rd areas, respectively (S1103).

  In other words, in this case, since the suspended variation effect is reduced by one and execution of the variation effect that is first suspended in time is started, the prefetch information No. 1 corresponding to the first variation effect that is suspended is started. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of one area are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the prefetch information 0th area corresponding to the changing effect being executed. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the prefetch information second area are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the prefetch information first area, and the prefetch information first The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the three areas are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the prefetch information second area, and the counters of the prefetch information fourth area The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223b1 to b4 are moved to the counter storage areas 223b1 to b4 of the prefetch information third area.

  Thereby, the same value as each counter C1-C3, CS1 stored in the reservation ball | bowl execution area 203c of the main controller 110 will be stored in the prefetch information 0th area, and the prefetch information 1st-4th. In the areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110 are stored.

  Next, the variation pattern in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command in the processing of S1002 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1104). Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the extracted variation pattern to the display control device 113 is set (S1105). The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display is performed on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start display control of fluctuating effects.

  Next, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1106). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 113 of the extracted stop type is set (S1105). The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. The display control device 114 sets a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set by the processing of S1105 is confirmed and displayed. To do.

  Next, in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the value of the retained ball number counter 223a is decremented by 1 as the retained ball is consumed (that is, the variation display corresponding to the retained ball is set). (S1108), a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the reserved ball number indicated by the value of the updated held ball number counter 223a is set (S1109). Then, the process returns to the main process.

  The display reserved ball number command set by the process of S1109 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. The The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of balls held by counting the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, a notification process (S909) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this notification processing (S909).

  The notification process (S909) is a process that is executed every millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 22), determines the pressing operation status of the notification button 23, and the player presses the notification button 23. A pre-read process is executed when it continues for more than 1 second, and if a big win is present in the running or on-hold variation effect, a big jackpot notification image for notifying that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Display.

  Specifically, first, notification button determination processing for determining whether or not the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is performed is executed (S1201), and then notification for determining whether or not the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is continued for one second or more. An execution determination process is executed (S1202). In this notification execution determination process, when it is determined that the pressing operation of the notification button 23 has continued for one second or longer, the display of the jackpot notification image is started and the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated. . Details of the notification button determination process and the notification execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 (a) and 26 (b), respectively.

  Next, a ball launch stop determination process for determining whether or not the ball launch into the game area of the game board 13 is stopped is executed (S1203). Details of the ball launch stop determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, notification display setting processing is executed (S1204). In the notification display setting process, when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is continued for 1 second or longer, the variation effect being executed becomes a big hit, or there is a change effect that becomes a big hit among the pending variation effects. If it is determined that the variation effect being executed is a jackpot, or there is a variation effect that is a jackpot among the pending variation effects, the jackpot notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Execute the control to be displayed. Further, in the notification display setting process, when the jackpot notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, when the launch of the ball to the game area of the game board 13 is stopped, the remaining variation effect being executed remains. Control is also performed to display on the third symbol display device 81 a variation time notification image that displays the variation time and each variation time of the pending variation effect. Details of the notification display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a notification button invalid release process is executed (S1206). In the notification button invalid release processing, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 invalidated by the processing of the notification execution determination processing (S1202) is canceled on condition that execution of all the suspended variation effects has been completed. It is processing. For details of the notification button invalid release processing, refer to FIG. When the notification button invalidation canceling process ends, the notification process ends and the process returns to the main process.

  Next, the details of the notification button determination process (S1201), which is one process of the notification process, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26A is a flowchart showing notification button determination processing.

  In the notification button determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification button invalid flag 223h is on (S1301). If the notification button invalid flag 223h is off (S1301: No), it means that it is not a period during which the effective operation of the notification button 23 is invalid, and it is then determined whether or not the notification execution flag 223d is on ( S1302). As a result, when the notification execution flag 223d is off (S1302: No), it means that the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed, and then the notification button 23 is pressed. It is determined whether it is turned on (S1303).

  If the notification button 23 is pressed (S1303: Yes), 1 is added to the notification button on counter 223c (S1304), the notification button determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process.

  Here, the notification process in which the notification button determination process is executed is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process. When the notification button 23 is continuously pressed in the situation where the notification button 23 is not pressed for a time period that is not invalidated by the processing of S1301 to S1304 and the notification button 23 is not pressed. In addition, the time during which the pressing operation is continued is counted in units of 1 millisecond by the notification button on counter 223c.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the notification button 23 has not been pressed (not turned on) (S1303: No), the notification button on counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S1305), and the notification button determination process is terminated. Return to the notification process. As a result, when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is interrupted in less than one second (when the player releases the notification button 23 that has been pressed in less than one second), the notification button on counter 223c is initialized to zero. Therefore, when the notification button 23 is pressed again, the duration of the pressing operation can be correctly counted again by the notification button on counter 223c.

  Further, when the notification button invalid flag 223h is determined to be on as a result of the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), and when the notification execution flag 223d is determined to be on as a result of the processing of S1302 (S1302: Yes). The process proceeds to S1305, the notification button on counter 223c is initialized to 0, the notification button determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process.

  When the notification button invalid flag 223h is on, the count-up in the notification button on counter 223c is not performed, so that the pressing operation of the notification button 23 can be invalidated. Also, in this case, by resetting the notification button on counter 223c to 0, after the invalid period of the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is canceled, if the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is performed, The duration time can be correctly counted again by the notification button on counter 223c.

  Even when the notification execution flag 223d is on, the notification button on counter 223c is initialized to 0 so that the notification button 23 is pressed again after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is completed. In such a case, the duration of the pressing operation can be correctly counted by the notification button on counter 223c.

  Next, the details of the notification execution determination process (S1202), which is one process of the notification process, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26B is a flowchart showing notification execution determination processing.

  In the notification execution determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification button on counter 223c is 1000 or more (S1311). If the notification button on counter 223c is less than 1000 (S1311: No), the notification execution determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process.

  On the other hand, when the notification button on counter 223c is 1000 or more (S1311: Yes), the notification execution flag 223d is set to on (S1312), and the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to on (S1313). As a result, when the player presses the notification button 23 for 1000 milliseconds or longer, that is, for one second or longer, the notification execution flag 223d is set to ON, thereby pressing the notification button 23. The execution of the notification based on the operation is started.

  In other words, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), it is not notified whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect being executed and the variation effect being held. Unless there are special circumstances, such as when you want to stop a game and leave, or when you want to complete a call or email on your mobile phone, Knowing whether or not any of these will be a big hit before the on-hold variation effect is executed, on the contrary, the game is deprived. By notifying whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed and the variation effect being held for the first time after the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), the player can If the touch button is unintentionally touched and the touched time is less than a predetermined time, whether or not a jackpot is included in any of the running or pending variation effects. , It can be suppressed from being known to the player.

  In addition, when the notification button 23 is turned on by the processing of S1313 and the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is disabled. As will be described later, the invalidation of the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is continued until the execution of all the changing effects including the reserved portion is completed in the pachinko machine 10. Thus, according to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, for example, when a player leaves the gaming machine, even if a person other than the player presses the notification button 23, at least the pachinko machine In FIG. 10, it is possible to make it impossible for a person other than the player to know whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit until the execution of all the variation effects including the reserved portion is completed. Therefore, the profit of the person who originally played the game can be protected.

  Next, the notification button on counter 223c is initialized to 0 (S1314). Then, the notification execution counter 223e is initialized to 0 (S1315), and in preparation for counting the execution time of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the notification execution determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the details of the ball launch stop determination process (S1203) which is one process of the notification process will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a ball launch stop determination process (S1203).

  In the ball launch stop determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball launch stop flag 223g is off and the ball non-detection counter 223f is 5000 or more (S1321), the ball launch stop flag 223g is off, and When the ball non-detection counter 223f is 5000 or more, the ball launch stop flag 223g is set to ON (S1322), and the process proceeds to S1323.

  When the ball launch stop flag 223g is off and the ball non-detection counter 223f is 5000 or more, it is determined that the ball launch has not stopped, and the general winning a prize opening 63, the first This means that the ball has not entered the entrance 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out 66 for more than 5 seconds. As described above, the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66 are all discharged from the gaming area by the ball launching unit 112a. These are all the mouths to which the balls are discharged out of the game area. That is, when there is no ball entering these mouths for 5 seconds or more, it indicates that the ball is not being launched into the game area by the ball launch unit 112a.

  In the process of S1322, in such a case, the ball launching of the ball launching unit 112a that launches the ball toward the game area of the game board 13 is stopped by setting the ball launch stop flag 223g to on. It shows that. The ball launch stop flag 223g is referred to in a notification display setting process described later.

  As a result of the processing of S1312, when the ball launch stop flag 223g is on or the ball non-detection counter 223f is less than 5000 (S1321: No), the processing proceeds to S1323.

  In the process of S1323, it is determined whether or not any of the general winning opening switch, the first winning opening switch, the specific winning opening switch, and the out opening switch is ON (S1323). As a result, when it is determined that any one of the general winning opening switch, the first winning opening switch, the specific winning opening switch, and the out opening switch is ON (S1323: Yes), the general winning opening 63, When a ball enters one of the first entrance 64, the specific winning entrance 65a, or the out entrance 66, the launch of the ball of the ball launch unit 112a that launches the ball toward the game area of the game board 13 is performed. First, the ball launch stop flag 223g is set to OFF (S1324), and the ball non-detection counter 223f is initialized to 0 (S1325). Then, the ball launch stop determination process ends. By initializing the ball non-detection counter 223f to 0, it is possible to again count the time during which no ball is detected at the general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the specific winning port 65a, and the out port 66. Yes.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1323, when it is determined that all of the general winning opening switch, the first winning opening switch, the specific winning opening switch, and the out opening switch are off (S1323: No), It is determined whether or not the ball launch stop flag 223g is on (S1326). If the ball launch stop flag 223g is off (S1326: No), 1 is added to the ball non-detection counter 223f (S1327). Here, the notification process in which the ball launch stop determination process is executed is a process executed every 1 millisecond in the main process. Therefore, by executing the processing of S1327, it is determined that the ball launching has not stopped, and the general winning entrance 63, the first winning entrance 64, the specific winning entrance 65a, and the out entrance 66 are entered. The time when there is no entry can be counted every 1 millisecond using the non-detection counter 223f. When the process of S1327 ends, the ball launch stop determination process ends, and the process returns to the notification process.

  On the other hand, if the ball launch stop flag 223g is on as a result of the processing of S1326 (S1326: Yes), the ball launch stop determination processing is terminated as it is, and the processing returns to the notification processing. As a result, when it is determined that the ball has been stopped, there is no ball entering the general winning hole 63, the first winning hole 64, the specific winning hole 65a, and the out hole 66. Since the value of the undetected counter 223f holds a value of 5000 or more, when the ball launch stop determination process is executed in the notification process executed after 1 millisecond, the process of S1321 and S1322 Subsequently, the ball launch stop flag 223g can be set to ON.

  Next, the details of the notification display setting process (S1204), which is one process of the notification process, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing notification display setting processing (S1204).

  In the notification display setting process, it is first determined whether or not the notification execution flag 223d is on (S1331). If the notification execution flag 223d is off (S1331: No), the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for 1 second or longer. Since it is not operated and notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not performed, the notification display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process.

  On the other hand, if the notification execution flag 223d is on (S1331: Yes), it is then determined whether the jackpot effect or the demonstration effect is being performed (S1332). If it is during a jackpot effect or a demonstration effect (S1332: Yes), the notification display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. Thereby, even if it is in the situation where the press operation of the notification button 23 is continuously performed for 1 second or more and the notification based on the press operation of the notification button 23 is performed, the jackpot effect or the demonstration effect is performed. If so, the notification is not executed. Therefore, when the jackpot effect is performed, the player can be concentrated on the jackpot. In addition, when the demonstration effect is being performed, the variation effect has not been performed for a predetermined time or more and there is no suspended variation effect, and notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is not necessary. . Accordingly, it is possible to prevent wasteful processing for performing the notification in such a case.

  Here, whether the jackpot effect or the demonstration effect is being performed is determined based on the command received from the main control device 110. For example, after receiving an opening command transmitted from the main controller 110 when starting the jackpot opening effect, receiving an ending command transmitted from the main controller 110 when starting the jackpot ending effect, The time until the ending production ends is judged as a jackpot production. Further, it is determined that the demonstration production is in progress from the time when the demonstration command instructing the start of the demonstration production is received from the main control device 110 until the next variation pattern command is received.

  In addition, during the jackpot presentation, notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 may be performed. In this case, in the processing of S1332, it may be determined only whether the demonstration presentation is being performed. . In this case, the player can check whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the pending variation effect during the jackpot performance, so whether the player can leave the seat or finish the business after the current jackpot ends Can be determined in advance during the jackpot production.

  Further, in the processing of S1332, it may be determined only whether or not the jackpot effect is being performed. In this case, the processing for performing the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 during the demonstration effect is performed wastefully. However, since the step of determining whether or not the demonstration is being performed is not necessary, the program for the notification display setting process can be reduced. Further, the process of S1332 may be omitted.

  In the process of S1332, if it is neither a jackpot effect nor a demo effect (S1332: No), then the value of the notification execution counter 223e is divided by 1000 to determine whether the remainder is 0 (S1333). Here, the notification execution counter 223e is initialized to 0 when the notification execution flag 223d is turned on, and is incremented by 1 every second as described later. Therefore, in the processing of S1333, it is determined that the remainder obtained by dividing the value of the notification execution counter 223e by 1000 is 0 (S1333: Yes) immediately after the notification execution flag 223d is turned on, and the notification execution flag 223d. This is every 1 second after turning on, and prefetch processing is executed at this timing (S1334). On the other hand, as a result of the process of S1333, when the remainder obtained by dividing the value of the notice execution counter 223e by 1000 is not 0 (S1333: No), the notice display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notice process.

  In the prefetching process of S1334, the values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the like stored in each area where the variation effect is suspended among the prefetch information first to fourth areas provided in the prefetch information storage area 223b are prefetched. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in the variation effect. The number of the fluctuating effects held (the number of held balls) is determined from the value of the held ball number counter 223a. In the prefetching process performed in the notification process, the values of the first random number counter C1 and the like stored in the prefetch information 0th area are also read, and it is determined whether or not the variation effect being executed is a big hit.

  Next, as a result of the pre-reading process, it is determined whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the pending variation effects, or whether a variation effect that is being executed is a big win (S1335). If it is determined that there is no variation effect that is a big hit, and that the variation effect that is being executed is also not a big win (is out of step) (S1335: No), the notification display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. .

  On the other hand, as a result of the pre-reading process, if it is determined that there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the pending variation effects, or if a variation effect that is being executed is a big winner (S1335: Yes), a jackpot notification command is issued. Set (S1336). The jackpot notification command is a command for causing the display control device 114 to display the jackpot notification image shown in FIG. 9A on the third symbol display device 81. If it is determined in the prefetch processing that there is a fluctuating effect, the information includes information for identifying the number of fluctuating effects to be held (a holding ball that is a big hit).

  The jackpot notification command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. By transmitting the jackpot notification command to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 changes the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 from the normal black color to the gold color. By doing so, control for displaying the jackpot notification image is executed.

  In this way, the jackpot notification image is included in the variation effect that is being executed and the variation effect that is being held while the notification button 23 is pressed by the player for one second or longer and the notification based on the press operation is performed. It is an image displayed when there is a fluctuating effect that is a big hit. If there is no variation effect that is a big hit in the running variation effect or the pending variation effect, the jackpot notification image is not displayed, and the color of the boy's hair HB in the small region Ds2 remains black. Therefore, the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer, and confirms whether the color of the boy's hair HB displayed in the small area Ds2 remains black or changes to gold. It is possible to confirm whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect and the pending variation effect. Therefore, when a player wants to leave the game after stopping the game, or when he wants to finish a call such as a mobile phone call or an email, the user presses the notification button 23 continuously for 1 second or more to execute. In order to know whether or not there is a variation effect that will be a big win among the fluctuation productions of pending and pending fluctuation productions, if there is no fluctuation production that will be a big hit, in order to perform actions such as leaving or completing the business The player can make a decision to stop the game immediately. Further, if there is a fluctuating effect that is a big hit, the player can make a decision to continue the game until the big hit. In other words, the notification button 23 can determine whether or not the player can immediately perform the action when he / she wants to leave the seat or complete the business.

  In the process of S1337 following the process of S1336, it is determined whether or not the ball launch stop flag 223g is on (S1337). If the ball launch stop flag 223g is off (S1337; No), the notification display setting process is terminated. And return to the notification process. On the other hand, if the ball launch stop flag 223g is on (S1337: Yes), first, the remaining variation time (the remaining variation time from the point in time until the variation effect ends) is calculated in the variation effect being executed. (S1338). The remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed is changed from the variation time determined based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 to the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern command. The time is calculated by subtracting the elapsed time from the start of the variation effect being executed.

  Next, with respect to the pending variation effects, the variation time is calculated for each variation effect (S1339). The variation times of the pending variation effects are calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch information first to fourth areas of the prefetch information storage area 223b. In the present embodiment, the variation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed). Therefore, when calculating each variation time of the pending variation effect, based on the value of the retained ball number counter 223a at the time of calculation, the number of reserved balls when the execution of each pending variation effect is started. This is done after calculating how many are.

  Then, a change time notification command is set (S1340), the notification display setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process. The change time notification command is used for notifying the display control device 114 of the remaining change time of the variation effect being executed calculated in the process of S1338 and each change time of the change effect on hold calculated in the process of S1339. It is a command. The variable time notification command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process.

  When the change time notification command is transmitted to the display control device 114, the change time notification image shown in FIG. 9B for notifying the player of each change time notified by the change time notification command is displayed as described above. Control is performed by the display control device 114 so that it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together with the jackpot notification image. By displaying this variation time notification image together with the jackpot notification image on the third symbol display device 81, the player not only knows whether there is a variation effect that will be a jackpot, but also the most recent jackpot It is possible to grasp the time to become. Therefore, the player can immediately determine whether or not there is time to leave or finish the business in consideration of the time until the last big hit.

  In addition, since the variation time (remaining variation time in the variation effect being executed) is displayed for each variation effect until the last big hit, the player can determine which variation effect is being executed. You can also decide whether you want to leave the office or do business.

  In the present embodiment, the variation time notification image is displayed in accordance with the jackpot notification image only when it is determined that the ball has been launched into the game area. This is because, as described above, there is no possibility of winning in the first entrance 64 when calculating each variation time of the variation effect on hold, so the number of reserved balls does not change. Even if the variation time is determined according to the number of held balls at the time when the execution of the effect starts (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed) This is because it can be calculated as follows. Conversely, in this embodiment, unless it is determined that the ball has been launched into the game area, the variable time notification image is not displayed together with the jackpot notification image. Therefore, since the launch of the ball to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to suppress the display of the inaccurate variation time with respect to the variation effect that is on hold, so that the player can leave the seat and do business It is possible to suppress erroneous determination of whether there is time.

  Note that even if the ball is not stopped in the game area, it is assumed that there will be no winning in the first entrance 64 (there is no holding of a new variation effect). Each variation time of the variation effect may be calculated and a variation time notification image may be displayed. As a result, even if ball launching to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to predict to some extent the time until the player wins a big hit and determine whether or not there is time to leave or finish the business. Can do. In this case, while ball launching is not stopped, characters such as “(expected)” are written on the right side of each variation time of the variation effect that is displayed on the variation time notification image, The character of each variation time of the variation time may be darkened so as to indicate to the player that each value is based on an assumption. If it is determined that ball launch has been stopped, the character “(expected)” is erased, or the brightness of the character is displayed brightly, and the pending time displayed on the variable time notification image is displayed. You may show so that a player may understand that each variation time of a variation effect is an exact value.

  In addition, when the variation time (variation pattern) of the variation effect determined at the time of starting the variation effect is determined regardless of the number of reserved balls at that time, the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. Even if not, it is possible to correctly calculate each variation time of the pending variation effect by the look-ahead process. Therefore, in this case, the process of S1337 is omitted, and after the process of S1336, the process of S1338 to S1340 is executed, regardless of whether or not the ball has been launched into the game area. When the notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the variable time notification image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 together.

  Next, the details of the notification stop determination process (S1205), which is one process of the notification process, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a flowchart showing notification stop determination processing (S1205).

  In the notification stop determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification execution flag 223d is on (S1351). If the notification execution flag 223d is off (S1351: No), the notification stop determination process is terminated and the notification process is finished. Return to. On the other hand, if the notification execution flag 223d is on (S1351: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the notification execution counter 223e is 5000 (S1352).

  If the notification execution counter 223e is not 5000 (S1352: No), 1 is added to the notification execution count 223e (S1355), the notification stop determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process. Through the processing of S1355, while the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is being executed, the notification execution counter 223e is incremented by 1 from the start of execution until the value of the notification execution counter 223e reaches 5000. . Here, the notification process in which the notification stop determination process is executed is executed every 1 millisecond in the main process. Therefore, the time during which the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed is as follows: The notification execution counter 223e counts for 1 millisecond for 5000 milliseconds (5 seconds).

  As a result of the processing of S1352, if the notification execution counter 223e is 5000 (S1352: Yes), a notification stop command is set (S1353), the notification execution flag 223d is set to OFF (S1354), and notification stop determination processing is performed. End and return to the notification process. If the execution of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is continued for 5 seconds by the processing of S1353 and S1354, the execution of the notification is terminated.

  The notification stop command notifies the display control device 114 that the notification is stopped based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, and the jackpot notification image indicating the presence of the jackpot displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or the variation time. This is a command for terminating the display of the notification image. The notification stop command set by the process of S1353 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display controller 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. When the display control device 114 displays the jackpot notification image or the variable time notification image on the third symbol display device by receiving the notification stop command, the display control device 114 performs control to stop displaying these images.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 (b), details of the notification button invalid release processing (S1206) will be described. FIG. 29B is a flowchart showing the notification button invalid release processing (S1206).

  In the notification button invalidation release process, first, it is determined whether or not the notification button invalid flag 223h is on (S1361). If the notification button invalid flag 223h is off (S1361: No), it is not the invalid period of the pressing operation of the notification button 23, so the notification button invalidation canceling process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. On the other hand, if the notification button invalid flag 223h is on (S1361: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the confirmed command flag 223i is on (S1362).

  If the confirmed command flag 223i is off (S1362: No), the notification button invalidation canceling process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the notification process. On the other hand, if the confirmed command flag 223i is on (S1362: Yes), the confirmed command flag 223i is set to off (S1363), and then it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number counter 223a is 0 (S1364). As a result, if the number of held balls counter 223a is not 0 (S1364: No), the notification button invalidation cancellation processing is terminated as it is, and the processing returns to the notification processing. On the other hand, if the held ball number counter 223a is 0 (S1364: Yes), the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to off (S12364), the notification button invalidation release process is terminated, and the process returns to the notification process.

  Here, if the confirmed command flag 223i is on, that is, if the number-of-holds counter 223a is 0 when the confirmed command is received from the main control device 110, it means that the execution of all the changing effects including the amount for the hold is completed. This means that the on-hold variation effect is zero. In other words, in the present embodiment, after the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is set to invalid, all of the variable effects including the reserved amount (including the variable effects held after the invalid setting is made) are included. When the execution is finished and there is no pending variation effect, the notification button invalid flag 223h is set to OFF, and the invalidation of the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is released.

  Thus, in this embodiment, when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated until the pending variation effect becomes zero. That is, even if the notification button 23 is pressed during that period, the notification is not executed. Thus, according to the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, for example, when a player leaves the gaming machine, even if a person other than the player presses the notification button 23, at least the pachinko machine In FIG. 10, it is possible to make it impossible for a person other than the player to know whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit until the pending variation effect becomes zero. Therefore, the profit of the person who originally played the game can be protected.

  Next, each process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 40. The MPU 231 is broadly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and a V interrupt signal detected by the MPU 231. There is a V-interrupt process executed in the case of The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the image controller 237 to the MPU 231. The image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for completing the image drawing process for one frame. To do.

  The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  In this main process, an initial setting process is executed (S1401). Specifically, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 236 is performed. Various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start is normally started.

  After the process of S1401, interrupt permission is set (S1402), and thereafter the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1402, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30B is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by a command determination process (S1602) of a V interrupt process, which will be described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30C, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 30C is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 13) is created and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. By executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. . Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described, and then details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In the V interrupt process, first, a command determination process (S1602) is executed, and then a display setting process (S1603) is executed. In the command determination process (S1602), the contents of the command stored in the command buffer area are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. For example, when a display variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer area, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern type indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the detailed variation pattern is supported. The display data table for change is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of the change effect, there is a high possibility that the display change pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area in 20 milliseconds. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, it is possible to quickly grasp the aspect such as the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and to produce the effect image corresponding to the aspect. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S1603), the address specified by the pointer 233c is defined based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b by the command determination process (S1602). According to the drawn contents, the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specifically specified.

  Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, a task process is then executed (S1604). In this task process, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is determined based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S1603). In addition to specifying, for each sprite, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S1605). In this drawing processing, the drawing list shown in FIG. 13 is generated from the types of various sprites constituting one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task processing (S1604). Transmit to the image controller 237. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1606). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S1606, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. When reception of a display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (other than 15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear out of reach, out of front / rear out) The stop type table corresponding to the reach (completely missed) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the changing effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S1402), which is one process of the V interrupt process, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the command determination process. The command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114.

  In this command determination process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S1701). If there is no unprocessed new command (S1701: No), the command determination process is terminated. Return to V interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S1701: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S1603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S1702), and then For all unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S1703).

  Then, in the unprocessed command, it is first determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command (S1704). If there is a display reserved ball number command (S1704: Yes), the held ball number command processing is performed. Is executed (S1705), and the process returns to S1701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32A, details of the reserved ball number command processing (S1705) will be described. FIG. 32A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This reserved ball number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display reserved ball number command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the reserved ball number command processing, first, the new reserved ball number command flag is turned on (S1801). The new reserved ball number command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that the display reserved ball number command has been processed in the ON state. Next, the number of reserved balls included in the display-holding ball number command is acquired (S1802). In the process of S1802, if two or more display reserved ball number commands are stored in the command buffer area, the reserved ball number information is acquired from the display stored ball number command stored last. Thereby, the newest number of reserved balls can be acquired.

  Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the process of S1802 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to other numbers of reserved balls are turned off. (S1803), the process returns to the command determination process. In the display setting process, when the new reserved ball number command flag is ON, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of held balls corresponding to the number determined flag set to ON is referred to as the held ball by referring to the number determining flag. The reserved image data is expanded so as to be displayed in the number display area Db.

  Referring back to FIG. 31, if it is determined in the processing of S1704 that there is no display pending ball number command (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display confirmation command (S1706: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S1707), and the process returns to S1701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32B, details of the confirmation command process (S1707) will be described. FIG. 32B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command process. This confirmation command process executes a process corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the confirmation command process (S1707), the confirmation command flag is set to ON (S1811), and this process ends. The confirmation command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S1603) that the display confirmation command is received in the ON state. In the display setting process, the state of the confirmed command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is executed so that the display of the confirmed display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. . In addition, after processing the setting of the display of the variation effect, if the confirmed command flag does not turn on even after the effect time set for the variation effect has elapsed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the display setting process is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 31, if it is determined that there is no display confirmation command in the processing of S1706 (S1706: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a display demo command (S1708) (S1708: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S1709), and the process returns to S1701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 32C, details of the demo command processing (S1709) will be described. FIG. 32C is a flowchart showing the demo command process. This demo command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display demo command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the demonstration command processing (S1709), first, a demonstration display data table corresponding to the demonstration effect is selected from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S1821). Next, null data is written into the additional data table buffer 233b to clear the contents (S1822).

  Next, the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect displayed in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233e (S1823), and the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1824). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF, the demonstration display flag is set to ON, the confirmation display flag is set to OFF (S1825), and the process returns to the command determination process. The demonstration display flag is a flag indicating that a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmed display flag is a flag indicating that the confirmed display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state.

  By executing this demo command process, in the display setting process, the pointer 233c initialized by the process of S1824 is updated and the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the process of S1821 is updated. Then, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233c is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. In the display setting process, the time of the demonstration effect defined in the display data table for demonstration is measured using the time counter 233e in which the time data corresponding to the demonstration effect is set by the process of S1823, and the process of S1825 is performed. Based on the state of the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag set by the above, when it is determined that the demonstration effect in the display data table for demonstration is ended by the timing of the display setting control time counter 233e, the effect to be displayed next Then, control is performed so that the demonstration effect is displayed again.

  Further, when both the confirmation command and the demo command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S1707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag is turned on. Then, the demo command process (S1709) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned off by the process of S1825.

  Thereby, in such a case, the demonstration effect is displayed without performing the final display effect. Main controller 110 is configured to transmit a demo command if it does not come to the start timing of the fluctuating effect after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after transmitting the confirmation command. When the execution of the command determination process is started, it is impossible for both the confirmed command and the demo command to be stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, when these commands are all stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, there is a high possibility that the command transmission / reception is not normally performed.

  In such a case, since the display control device 114 gives priority to the demonstration effect that is not directly related to the game and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display it on the third symbol display device 81, the wrong fixed display effect is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player from misunderstanding the game result. In addition, since the demonstration effect is started without performing the final display effect, the player can easily recognize that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the player can immediately call a hall related person to request a countermeasure.

  Returning to FIG. 31, if it is determined in the processing of S1708 that there is no display demo command (S1708: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display variation pattern command (S1710) (S1710: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed (S1711), and the processing returns to S1701.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S1711) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, based on the variation pattern (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command for display, one detailed variation pattern is executed from among a plurality of detailed variation patterns in which variation effects are executed in the variation time. A variation pattern is determined (S1831). The detailed variation pattern determined here uniquely determines the content of the announcement effect performed during the variation effect.

  Next, for the determined details, the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern is read from the display data table storage area 232a and set in the display data table buffer 233a (S1832).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S1832, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. The table is set in the display data table buffer 233a.

  If the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern having a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233a, the change effect having the change time shorter than the set display data table is actually controlled by the main control. When instructed by the device 110, the main controller 110 displays a confirmation command (display confirmation command) while displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table on the third symbol display device 81. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table for change corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time in the display data table buffer 233a, the display data table is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when a variation effect having a variation time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233a is completed, a confirmation command from the main controller 110 is obtained. Until the display confirmation command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed, so that the player visually recognizes the restart effect as part of the variable effect. Until the stop display of the 3rd symbol is confirmed, the variation of the 3rd symbol in the 3rd symbol display device 81 can be continuously observed without a sense of incongruity.

  Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the additional data table buffer 233b (S1833). Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S1832, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233e (S1834). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1835), and the confirmation command flag, the demonstration display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to OFF (S1836).

  By setting the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag to OFF, it is possible to display the varying effect on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the demonstration effect or the confirmed display effect being displayed. Further, when both the confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area at the start of execution of the command determination process, the above-described confirmation command process (S1707) is executed first, and the confirmation command flag Is set to ON, then, this variation pattern command process (S1711) is executed, and the confirmed command flag is turned OFF by the process of S1836.

  When the process of S1836 is completed, the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S1837), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the display data table for variation set in the display data table buffer 233a by the processing of S1832 while updating the pointer 233c initialized by the processing of S1835. The drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233c are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 are specified.

  Further, in the display setting process, using the time counter 233e in which the variation time data is set in the process of S1834, the variation effect time defined in the variation display data table is counted, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. If it is determined that the confirmation command has been completed, a confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received. If the confirmation command (display confirmation command) cannot be received within a predetermined time after the end of the variation effect, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command, the display Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. In contrast, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so the confirmation command process corresponding to the display confirmation command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for use is executed later, and the fixed command flag set by the display fixed command can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S1836. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if priority is given to the processing corresponding to the display demo command, Since the variation effect accompanying the variation pattern command is not performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command determination process, the presence / absence of the display demo command is determined first, so the demo command process corresponding to the display demo command is always executed first. The process corresponding to the change pattern command for execution is executed later, and the display data table for demonstration set in the display data table buffer 233a by the display demonstration command is rewritten to the display data table for change by overwriting as in the process of S1832. Can do. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Returning to FIG. 31, if it is determined in step S1710 that there is no display variation pattern command (S1710: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a display stop type command (S1712: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S1713), and the process returns to S1701.

  Here, the details of the stop type command process (S1713) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display stop type command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command process, first, stop type information (15R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, 15R normal big hit, 15R normal big hit, front / rear outreach, reach other than front / rear out, or complete outage) is indicated. A stop type table is determined (S1841), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 30C) is executed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the symbol display device 81 is finally set (S1842).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S1842 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S1843), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, as described above, in the display data table for change, the processing of S1842 is performed as type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the drawing content corresponding to the address after the predetermined time. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by is described. In the task process (S1604) described above, the stop symbol set by the process of S1842 is identified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set in S1843 after the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is started, and the identification is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address of the character storage area 234a in which image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified.

  In addition, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. If there are two or more display stop type commands stored in the command buffer area, part of the command will change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command will stop display for mistakenly. There is also the possibility of being interpreted as a type command. In the process of S1841, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment is set by the process of S1842. In such a case, the stop type table may be determined on the assumption that the stop type is a special stop symbol even when the stop type is completely off.

  Here, if a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the jackpot stop symbol will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually off. The player may misunderstand that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a big hit, which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as shown in this embodiment, by setting a stop symbol corresponding to complete detachment, in actuality, if it is a big hit, the stop symbol of complete detachment is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

  Returning to FIG. 31, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S1712 (S1712: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot notification command among the unprocessed commands ( If there is a jackpot notification command (S1714: Yes), the jackpot notification command process is executed (S1715), and the process returns to S1701.

  Here, the details of the jackpot notification command process (S1715) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34A is a flowchart showing the jackpot notification command processing. This jackpot notification command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the jackpot notification command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the jackpot notification command, first, the jackpot notification command flag is set to ON (S1851). Here, the jackpot notification command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S1603) that the jackpot notification command has been processed in the ON state.

  Next, information for specifying a holding ball that is a big hit in the jackpot notification command is acquired (S1852). And it corresponds to the reservation ball which becomes the big hit specified with the information acquired by processing of S1852 with respect to the reservation ball big hit flag which is provided for each holding ball and shows that it becomes a big hit in the reservation ball when turned on The reserved ball jackpot flag to be turned on is set to ON, and the held ball jackpot flag corresponding to the other held balls is set to OFF (S1853), and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the processing in S1852, if the jackpot notification command does not include information for specifying the holding ball that will be a jackpot, it means that it is a jackpot in the variation effect being executed. Therefore, in this case, in the processing of S1853, the holding ball big hit flag corresponding to all the holding balls is set to OFF.

  In the display setting process, when the jackpot notification command is ON, a jackpot notification image (a boy image of the hair HB color “golden”) indicating the presence of the jackpot is displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81. As shown, the jackpot notification image data is expanded. At the same time, based on the reserved ball jackpot flag, the jackpot reserved image data is expanded so that the number of reserved balls corresponding to the reserved ball that is a big hit is displayed in “red” in the reserved ball number display area Db.

  Returning to FIG. 31, if it is determined that there is no jackpot notification command in the processing of S1714 (S1714: No), it is then determined whether there is a variable time notification command among the unprocessed commands (S1716). ) If there is a change time notification command (S1716: Yes), change time notification command processing is executed (S1717), and the processing returns to S1701.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 34B, details of the variable time notification command processing (S1717) will be described. FIG. 34B is a flowchart showing the change time notification command process. This variable time notification command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the variable time notification command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the variable time notification command, first, the variable time notification command flag is set to ON (S1861). Here, the variable time notification command flag is a flag for notifying the display setting process (S1603) that the variable time notification command has been processed in the ON state.

  Next, from the information included in the change time notification command, the remaining change time of the change effect being executed and each change time of the change effect on hold are acquired, stored in the work RAM 233 (S1862), and command determination processing Return to.

  In the display setting process, when the variable time notification command is ON, a variable time notification image for displaying the remaining time of the variable effect being executed and each variable time of the pending change effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image data for changing time notification is expanded so as to be displayed in the small area Ds3.

  Returning to FIG. 31, if it is determined that there is no variable time notification command in the processing of S1716 (S1716: No), it is then determined whether there is a notification stop command among the unprocessed commands (S1718). If there is a notification stop command (S1718: Yes), the notification stop command process is executed (S1719), and the process returns to S1701.

  Here, the details of the notification stop command process (S1719) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34C is a flowchart showing notification stop command processing. This notification stop command process executes a process corresponding to the notification stop command received from the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the notice stop command, the notice stop command flag is set to ON (S1871), and the process returns to the notice command. Here, the notification stop command flag is a flag that notifies the display setting process (S1603) that the notification stop command has been processed in the ON state. In the display setting process, when the notification stop command is on, the jackpot that has been developed in order to erase (not display) the jackpot notification image and the variable time notification image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The image data for notification, the reserved image data for jackpot, and the image data for change time notification are deleted.

  Returning to FIG. 31, if it is determined that there is no notification stop command in the processing of S1718 (S1718: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S1722), and the processing returns to S1701. . In the process of S1722, for example, if a continuous notice command instructing the start of the continuous notice effect is received from the audio lamp control device 113, an additional data table corresponding to the mode of the continuous notice effect indicated by the command is added. The data is read from the data table storage area 232b and stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. As a result, in the display setting process, for the image displayed according to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, the continuous notice effect is displayed in the third symbol display according to the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b. Control to be displayed on the device 81 is executed.

  In the processing of S1701, which is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S1701: Yes). ), The processing of S1702 to S1722 is executed again. The processes in S1701 to S1722 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. If it is determined in S1701 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area (S1701: No). ), The command determination process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 39, the details of the above-described display setting process (S1603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIGS. 35 and 36 are flowcharts showing the display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 35, it is first determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S1901). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S1901: No). ), It is determined that a new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S1902 to S1910 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1911. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S1901: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to off (S1902), S1903 A process corresponding to the new command is executed by each process of S1910.

  In the process of S1903, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S1903). If the new reserved ball number command flag is ON (S1903: Yes), the display is performed in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the reserved ball number command has been processed, and the reserved image setting process is executed (S1904).

  Here, the details of the hold image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In the reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls for the number of reserved balls notified from the sound lamp control device 113 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the number of reserved balls for display. Therefore, it is a process for developing the image data.

  In the reserved image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to ON is stored in the number of reserved balls display area Db ( The reserved image data to be displayed in (see FIG. 4) is developed (S1951). In the task processing (S1604), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the reserved image is specified based on the expanded reserved image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing are determined.

  In the reserved image setting process, after the process of S1951, the new reserved ball number command is set to OFF (S1952), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 35, after the hold image setting process (S1904) or in the process of S1903, when it is determined that the new hold ball number command flag is OFF (S1903: No), the jackpot notification command flag is then set. It is determined whether or not the jackpot notification command flag is ON (S1905: Yes), if the jackpot notification command is processed in the previous command determination process, the jackpot notification image setting process is executed. (S1906).

  Here, the details of the jackpot notification image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing the jackpot notification image setting process. This jackpot notification image setting process is for developing the image data to display the jackpot notification image shown in FIG. 9A on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the jackpot notification command. It is processing of.

  In the jackpot notification image setting process, first, as a jackpot notification image indicating the presence of a jackpot, for a jackpot notification for displaying an image of a boy whose hair HB is “gold” in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 The image data is developed (S1961). In the task processing (S1604), based on the developed image data for jackpot notification, the “boy of hair HB color“ golden ”” is identified as the type of sprite (display object) constituting the jackpot notification image, Instead of “boy with hair HB color“ black ”” defined in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, Various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle for displaying “Golden boy” are determined.

  Next, with reference to the holding ball jackpot flag provided for each holding ball, the jackpot holding image data for displaying the holding ball number symbol of the holding ball corresponding to the holding ball jackpot flag set to ON in “red” Is expanded (S1962). In the task process (S1604), based on the developed jackpot reserved image data, the “red” reserved ball number symbol is specified as the sprite (display object) type, and the “blue” reserved ball number symbol is displayed. Instead, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, for displaying the number of reserved balls of the target reserved ball in “red” are determined.

  In the process of S1962, if the reserved ball jackpot flag corresponding to all the held balls is off, the variation effect being executed is a jackpot, so the jackpot reserved image data is not expanded, and the process of S1963 Transition to processing.

  After the process of S1962, the jackpot notification command flag is set to OFF (S1963), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Returning to FIG. 35, after the jackpot notification image setting process (S1906) or in the process of S1905, it is determined that the jackpot notification command flag is off (S1905: No), then the variable time notification command flag is changed. It is determined whether or not it is on (S1907). If the variable time notification command flag is on (S1907: Yes), it is determined that the variable time notification command has been processed in the previous command determination process, and the variable time notification image setting process is executed (S1908).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 38A, details of the change time notification image setting process will be described. FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the change time notification image setting process. This variable time notification image setting processing is performed in order to display the variable time notification image shown in FIG. 9B on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the variable time notification command. It is a process for expanding.

  In the variation time notification image setting process, first, the remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed and each variation time of the variation effect being held stored in the work RAM 233 by the process for the variation time notification command are referred to. The image data for variable time notification for displaying the variable time notification image for displaying the remaining time of the variable effect being executed and each variable time of the variable effect on hold in the small area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 is developed. (S1966). Then, the notification stop command flag is set to OFF (S1967), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  In the task process (S1604), the type of sprite (display object) constituting the variable time notification image is specified based on the variable time notification image data developed by the process of S1966. Then, instead of the sprite displayed in the small area Ds3 defined by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a or the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233b, or superimposed on the sprite. Thus, in order to display the variation time notification image in the small area Ds3, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite constituting the variation time notification image.

  Returning to FIG. 35, after the variable time notification image setting process (S1908) or when it is determined in the processing of S1907 that the variable time notification command flag is off (S1907: No), then the notification stop command flag It is determined whether or not is on (S1909). If the notification stop command flag is on (S1909: Yes), it is determined that the notification stop command has been processed in the previous command determination process, and the notification image erasure process is executed (S1910).

  Here, the details of the notification image erasing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the notification image erasing process. This notification image erasing process is a process for erasing the jackpot notification image and the variable time notification image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the notification stop command.

  In the notification image erasing process, first, the jackpot notification image data and the jackpot hold image data developed by the jackpot notification image setting process (S1906), and the variation time notice developed by the variation time notification image setting process (S1908). The image data is deleted (S1971). Then, the notification stop command flag is set to OFF (S1972), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  By the processing of S1971, the jackpot notification image data, the jackpot hold image data, and the variable time notification image data are deleted. The notification image and the variable time notification image are deleted.

  Returning to FIG. 35, whether the notification image erasing process (S1910) ends, or whether it is determined in the process of S1909 that the notification stop command flag is off (S1909: No), or is a new command in the process of S1901 If it is determined that the flag is off (S1901: No), then a pointer update process is executed (S1911).

  Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update processing is performed by updating the pointer 233c that designates an address at which the corresponding drawing content is to be acquired from the display data table and the additional data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. It is a process to perform.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233c (S1981). That is, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233c is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. As described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 in accordance with the data stored in the buffer 233a, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Can read substantial data.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233c by the processing of S1981, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233c is End information. Is discriminated (S1982). As a result, if it is End information (S1982: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a, the pointer 233c has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is a demonstration display data table or a restart display data table (S1983), and the demonstration display data table or the restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S1983: Yes), the pointer 233c is set to 1 (S1984), and further corresponds to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table or restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a. The time data is set in the time counter 233e (S1985), and the process proceeds to S1987. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table or the restart display data table. Can be displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1983 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a is neither a display data table for demonstration nor a restart display data table (S1983: No), the pointer 233c The value is subtracted by 1 (S1986), and the process proceeds to S1987. Thereby, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demonstration display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a display data table for change or a fixed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a. Since the drawing content of the previous address in which End information is written is always developed, the third image display device 81 displays the last image specified by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

  As a result of the process of S1982, when it is determined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a that the data at the address indicated by the pointer 233c updated by the process of S1981 is not End information (S1982: No) ), Skips the processing of S1983 to S1986, and proceeds to the processing of S1987.

  In the process of S1987, it is determined whether or not the confirmed command flag is turned on (S1987). If the confirmed command flag is not turned on and is turned off (S1987: No), the pointer update process is terminated and the display setting is finished. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S1987: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113, so the display data table buffer The value of the pointer 233c is set to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where End information is stored in the display data buffer set to 233a (S1988), and the value of the time counter is set to 1. (S1989) to return to the display setting process. Thereby, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing content defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

  Returning to FIG. 35, after the pointer update process (S1911), the pointer 233c updated by the pointer update process is displayed from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233a and the additional data table buffer 233b. The drawing contents of the address to be read are expanded (S1912). In the task process (S1604), the hold image developed in the hold image setting process (S1904), the jackpot notification image developed in the jackpot notification image setting process (S1906), and the variable time notification image setting process (S1908). The type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S1912 together with the changed time notification image developed in step S1912, and the display coordinate position and the enlargement ratio are determined for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as a rotation angle are determined.

  When Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. When the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared with null data, the null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233b.

  After the process of S1912, the value of the time counter 233e is decremented by 1 (S1913), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233e after the subtraction is 0 or less (S1914). If the value of the time counter 233e is 1 or more (S1914: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233e is 0 or less (S1914: Yes), it means that the effect time of the production corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a has passed. At this time, if the display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233a, a confirmation command (display confirmation command for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S1915, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed command flag is ON (S1915).

  As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S1915: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. The mode of the fixed display effect according to the stop symbol indicated by the symbol determination flag is determined, the fixed display data table of the mode is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b. The contents are cleared (S1916). Next, time data corresponding to the effect time of the final display is set in the time counter 233e (S1917), and the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1918). Then, the confirmation command flag is set to OFF (S1919), and after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S1920), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly used as the work RAM 233. (S1921), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when a display data table for change is set in the display data table buffer 233a or the like, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233a to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S1921 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is started from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and therefore the variation based on the data table starts in the variation display data table. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before is determined until a predetermined time elapses from this. In the task process (S1604), the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S1921 until a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation. And the 3rd symbol which should be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information prescribed | regulated to the above-mentioned display data for a fluctuation | variation to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on in S1915 (S1915: No), the process proceeds to S1922 shown in FIG. 36 to determine whether the confirmation display flag is on (S1922). ). If the confirmed display flag is on (S1922: Yes), the determination result in S1914 (S1914: Yes) means that the confirmed display effect has ended, so the confirmed display flag is set to off. Later (S1923), the display data table for demonstration is set in the display data table buffer 233a (S1924), and then the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration effect displayed in the display data table for demonstration is stored in the time counter 233e. Setting is made (S1925). Then, the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1926), a demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S1927), and the display setting process is ended.

  By this, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demonstration effect command indicating the start of the demonstration effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, automatically, The drawing content can be set so that the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The condition satisfying the branching condition of S1922: Yes is when the confirmed display effect is performed. In this case, the content of the additional data table buffer 233b is cleared by the process of S1916. Therefore, in the process of S1924, the clear process of those data table buffers is omitted. Thereby, the processing load in the MPU 231 can be reduced. However, the process of clearing the additional data table buffer 233b may be executed in the process of S1924.

  In the process of S1922, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S1922: No), it is then determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S1928). If the demonstration display flag is on (S1928: Yes), the result of the determination in S1914 (S1914: Yes) means that the demonstration effect has ended. Return to interrupt processing. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1928, when the demonstration display flag is not on but off (S1928: No), the result of the determination in the process of S1914 (S1914: Yes) means that the variation effect has ended. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the variation effect, the display data table for variation corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a in order to start the restart effect. Accordingly, 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S1929), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S1930).

  If the restart timer counter is not a predetermined value (S1930: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. If the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S1930: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233a, and Null data is written in the additional data table buffer 233b. Clear (S1931). Then, time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233e (S1932), the value of the pointer 233c is initialized to 0 (S1933), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the display control device 114, the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 even if a predetermined time has elapsed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. When (display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the restart effect is an effect of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an image in which the third symbol is vibrated, so that the player uses the third symbol display device 81 to display the third symbol. If it is visually recognized that the third symbol vibrates and is displayed after the change of the stop is displayed, it can be recognized that the stop symbol is not fixed at that time.

  In addition, after the last drawing content prescribed | regulated by the restart display data table is expand | deployed, the drawing content is expand | deployed again from the head of the restart display data table by the above-mentioned pointer update process. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in such a manner that the third symbol is vibrated (oscillated) around a predetermined position. In the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary to display the screen at least once are defined. Then, by repeatedly expanding the drawing contents from the top of the restart display data table, a restart effect in which the third symbol is repeatedly vibrated is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, the restart effect is an effect that causes the 3rd symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the 3rd symbol, so that the 3rd symbol is swung at least once in the restart display data table. Since it is only necessary to store the drawing contents necessary for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be reduced.

  If a display confirmation command is received from the sound lamp controller 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S1916 shown in FIG. 35 is performed, and the display data table buffer is displayed. A final display data table is set in 233a. Thus, even during the restart effect, the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol discrimination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the final symbol display device 81 displays the final display effect. Can be displayed.

  Further, when a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2832 in FIG. A variation display data table is set in the data table buffer 233a, and a variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, when a display demonstration command is received from the audio lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2821 in FIG. 32C is performed, and the display data is displayed. A display data table for demonstration is set in the table buffer 233a, and a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be received is not received even if a predetermined time elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable effect. Since the effect is displayed in this case, there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise or malfunction. On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the display variation pattern command or the display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects in the third symbol display device 81 can be performed in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the details of the above-described drawing process (S1605), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, various sprite types constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1604) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), the drawing list shown in FIG. 13 is generated (S2001). That is, in the process of S2001, the address of the character storage area 234a in which image data of the sprite is stored is specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S1604). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As the drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the address of the character storage area 234a in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing target buffer information specified by a drawing target buffer flag (not shown) are transmitted to the image controller (S2002). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the first frame buffer provided in the video RAM 236 as drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the drawn image. When the drawing target buffer flag is 0, the second frame buffer provided in the video RAM as drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the drawn image.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and outputs the image information together with the drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is developed, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S2002, the drawing target buffer flag is updated (S2003). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” if the value is “0” and setting it to “0” if it is “1”. Is called. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer of the video RAM 236 every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 30C) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read, and image rendering is performed. When the processing and the display processing are executed, the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. A first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. . Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer. Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read are alternately designated for the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer every 20 milliseconds. As a result, the image display process for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while the image drawing process for one frame is being performed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed by the player, the running variation effect is a big hit or the pending variation effect When there is a fluctuating effect that is a jackpot, a jackpot notification image for notifying the presence of the jackpot is displayed. As a result, the player presses the notification button 23 to display the notification image when the player stops the game and wants to leave the seat, or when he / she wants to complete a message such as a phone call or email. It can be confirmed whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect being executed and the variation effect being held. Therefore, if there is no change effect that is a big hit, the player can make a determination to stop the game immediately in order to perform an action such as leaving or completing a business. Further, if there is a fluctuating effect that is a big hit, the player can make a decision to continue the game until the big hit. In other words, the notification button 23 can determine whether or not the player can immediately perform the action when he / she wants to leave the seat or complete the business.

  Further, unless the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), it is configured not to notify whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect being executed and the variation effect being held. ing. Unless there are special circumstances, such as when you want to stop a game and leave, or when you want to complete a call or email on your mobile phone, Knowing whether or not any of these will be a big hit before the on-hold variation effect is executed, on the contrary, the game is deprived. By notifying whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed and the variation effect being held for the first time after the notification button 23 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (1 second), the player can If the touch button is unintentionally touched and the touched time is less than a predetermined time, whether or not a jackpot is included in any of the running or pending variation effects. , It can be suppressed from being known to the player.

  In addition, if it is determined that there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the pending variation effects, in the jackpot notification image, which variation effect that is the big hit is a pending variation effect, that is, a reserved ball that is a big hit Is configured to be notified to the player. As a result, if the player can grasp that there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect, will it be a big hit immediately or will there be some time until the big hit? In addition, it is possible to know how many times the remaining rendition is performed until the big hit. Therefore, based on such information, the player can determine whether or not there is time to leave or finish the business before the big hit.

  Further, when the player presses the notification button 23 for 1 second or longer and there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or the variation effect being held, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Along with the jackpot notification image, a variation time notification image that displays the remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed and each variation time of the pending variation effect is displayed. Thereby, the player can grasp not only whether or not there is a fluctuating effect that is a big hit, but also the time until the big hit. Therefore, the player can immediately determine whether or not there is time to leave the seat or finish the business in consideration of the time until the big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, since the variation time (the remaining variation time in the variation effect being executed) is displayed for each variation effect until the big hit, the player can execute which variation effect. You can also decide whether you want to leave the office or do business while you are.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are merely examples, and other numerical values can naturally be adopted.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed, and there is a big hit in the running variation effect or the pending variation effect, the case where the jackpot notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described. However, when there is an operation of pressing the notification button 23, if there is no big hit in any of the fluctuation effects being executed and the fluctuation effects being held (that is, if any of the fluctuation effects is off) And an off notification image (for example, an image in which the color of the hair HB of a black boy's hair changes to white) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate to the player that there is no jackpot. Also good. In such a configuration, when there is a pressing operation of the notification button 23, if there is a big hit in the running variation effect or the pending variation effect, the jackpot notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You may comprise. As a result, when the player presses the notification button 23, depending on whether the jackpot notification image or the off-notification image is displayed, it is a big hit among the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. It is possible to grasp at a glance whether or not there is. On the other hand, when there is a pressing operation of the notification button 23, if there is no jackpot in any of the variation effects being executed and the variation effect being held, the missed notification image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When configured to display, when there is an operation of pressing the notification button 23 and there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed and the variation effect being held, it is configured not to notify anything. May be. As a result, if no notification is made when the player presses the notification button 23, there is a sense of expectation that there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or the variation effect being held. Can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where an image that changes the color of the boy's hair HB displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from normal black to gold is displayed as the jackpot notification image. It is not a thing. For example, a predetermined character may appear as a jackpot notification image, and the color or shape of the third figure that is variably displayed (for example, the color of a wooden box or the number displayed on the front of the wooden box) It may be changed. Further, an effect may be displayed around the third pattern, or the color of the back image and the speed at which the back image flows may be changed. Furthermore, a small jackpot notification image may be displayed at the corner of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. By displaying the jackpot notification image in a small size, it is difficult for a person other than the player to visually recognize the jackpot notification image, and it is easy to suppress the presence of the jackpot notification to others.

  Also, the presence of a jackpot may be announced only by the number of reserved balls. In this case, the presence of a jackpot may be notified by changing all the reserved ball number symbols displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db from normal blue to red. Further, as in the above-described embodiment, when a variation effect with the number of times of suspension being X (0 ≦ X ≦ 4) is a big hit among the variation effects on hold, the number of reserved balls displayed in the retained ball number display area Db Of the symbols, the Xth reserved ball number symbol from the left may be displayed in red, and the other reserved ball number symbols may be displayed in blue to announce the presence of the jackpot. Thus, it is possible to notify the player up to which variation effect among the pending variation effects is a big hit. At this time, if the variation effect being executed becomes a big hit, the change effect being executed becomes a big hit by displaying a part or all of the reserved ball number symbol in yellow different from red or blue. This may be notified to the player.

  In addition, by displaying only the variation time notification image on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the jackpot notification image, it is determined that there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit in the variation effect being executed or the variation effect being held. You may be notified. In this case, even if the ball launching to the game area is not stopped, the pre-reading process is executed based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23. If there is a fluctuating effect, the fluctuating time notification image may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. At this time, when the variation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed), the ball is thrown into the game area. If it is not stopped, the pending time cannot be correctly calculated for the pending variation effect because the number of balls held when the variation effect is actually started is not yet determined. Therefore, in this case, it is assumed that there is no winning in the first entrance 64 after that, even if the ball launching into the game area is not stopped, It is also possible to calculate each variation time of the variation effect on hold and display a variation time notification image. As a result, even if ball launching to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to predict to some extent the time until the player wins a big hit and determine whether or not there is time to leave or finish the business. Can do. In this case, while ball launching is not stopped, characters such as “(expected)” are written on the right side of each variation time of the variation effect that is displayed on the variation time notification image, The character of each variation time of the variation time may be darkened so as to indicate to the player that each value is based on an assumption. If it is determined that ball launch has been stopped, the character “(expected)” is erased, or the brightness of the character is displayed brightly, and the pending time displayed on the variable time notification image is displayed. You may show so that a player may understand that each variation time of a variation effect is an exact value.

  When the notification button 23 is pressed in the case where the variation time is determined according to the number of held balls at the time when execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed) If it is determined that a ball has been launched into the game area, the pre-read information in the pre-read information storage area 223b is stored in each of the pre-read information first to fourth areas as the variation time of each variation effect on hold. Of the variation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the shortest variation time may be calculated to display a variation time notification image. In this case, while ball launching is not stopped, a character such as “or more” may be written to the right of each variation time of the variation effect on hold displayed on the variation time notification image. This makes it possible to know at least how long it takes for the player to win a big hit even if the ball is not stopped in the game area, so it is possible to determine whether there is time to leave or complete the business. be able to.

  In addition, when the variation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the fluctuating effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed), in particular, the number of held balls at that time is When there is a tendency that the variation time tends to be shortened when there are many, if it is determined that the ball is not being launched into the game area when the notification button 23 is pressed, the variation time notification is made. In the image, not only the variation time (current variation time) of each variation effect in the case where the state where ball launching is stopped is maintained, but also the first prefetch information in the prefetch information storage area 223b for each variation effect. The shortest variation time (shortest variation time) among the variation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls is calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each of the fourth areas. Time and may display the shortest change time together. In this case, for the shortest variation time, a character such as “above” may be written on the right side. As a result, when the player feels that the time until the big hit will be long based on the current fluctuation time, the shortest change will be how much the time until the big hit will be shortened if the ball is launched. Since it can be grasped based on time, for example, it is possible to make the player make a decision to leave a ball or finish a business after a ball is hit and a jackpot is quickly established.

  Further, the presence of the jackpot may be notified not by an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 but by lighting / flashing of the illumination parts 29 to 33, or a variable display device separately from the illumination parts 29 to 33 You may notify by the lighting, blinking, etc. of the lamp | ramp provided in unit 80 grade | etc.,. Further, the presence of the jackpot may be notified by generating a predetermined sound, or may be notified by performing a predetermined operation on the accessory provided on the game board 13. Further, the combination of two or more of the display of the image on the third symbol display device 81, lighting / flashing of the illumination units 29 to 33 and other lamps, the sound generation, and the action of the accessory, You may announce its existence.

  Note that even when notifying that there is no jackpot in the running variation effect and the pending variation effect, a predetermined character may appear as the off-notification image, or the variably displayed third pattern of FIG. The color and shape may be changed. Further, an effect may be displayed around the third pattern, or the color of the back image and the speed at which the back image flows may be changed. Furthermore, a small disengagement notification image may be displayed at the corner of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. By displaying the miss notification image small, it is difficult for a person other than the player to visually recognize the miss notification image, and it is easy to suppress the presence of the jackpot to others. Further, by changing the color of a part or all of the reserved ball number symbol displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db from blue to gray, or deleting the reserved ball number symbol for a predetermined time, You may announce that there is no jackpot in the fluctuating production. Further, it may be notified not by an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 that there is no jackpot, but by lighting / flashing of the lighting parts 29 to 33, or variable separately from the lighting parts 29 to 33. You may notify by the lighting, blinking, etc. of the lamp | ramp provided in the display apparatus unit 80 grade | etc.,. Further, it may be notified that a jackpot does not exist by generating a predetermined sound, or may be notified by performing a predetermined action on an accessory provided on the game board 13. Further, the jackpot is obtained by a combination of two or more of the display of the image on the third symbol display device 81, lighting / flashing of the illumination units 29 to 33 and other lamps, the sound generation, and the operation of the accessory. You may announce that it does not exist.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the presence of the jackpot is notified when the notification button 23 is pressed for 1 second or longer has been described. The presence of a jackpot may be notified when the button is pressed multiple times (for example, twice). Thereby, when the player has unintentionally touched the notification button 23 and the number of touches is less than the predetermined number within a predetermined time, the jackpot presence is not notified. Therefore, when the player does not intend, it is possible to prevent the player from knowing whether a big win is included in any of the running variation effects or the pending variation effects, and to keep the game interesting be able to.

  Further, when it is detected that the notification button 23 has been pressed, the presence of a jackpot may be immediately notified. As a result, even if the player does not intend to do so, the notification is performed. However, if the player presses the notification button 23, the presence or absence of the jackpot can be immediately known. When it is desired to complete the process, it can be determined earlier whether or not the action may be immediately executed.

  In addition, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, a screen for allowing the user to select whether or not such a notification is acceptable is not immediately notified of the presence of the jackpot. The information may be displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81, and the player may select whether or not the notification may be performed by operating the frame button 22 or the like. Thereby, when the player misunderstands other functions and performs a predetermined pressing operation on the notification button, the player can be made aware of the misunderstanding. In addition, it is possible to suppress notification of the presence of a jackpot even though the player does not want it.

  Although the case where the notification button 23 is provided on the right side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 in the front view has been described in the above embodiment, the notification button 23 may be disposed at a position different from the upper plate 17. For example, the notification button 23 may be provided on the lower plate unit 15, or the notification button 23 may be provided on the operation handle 51. By providing at a position different from the upper plate 17 where the frame button 22 is provided, it is possible to suppress the notification button 23 being operated by mistake with the frame button 22. Further, by providing the notification button 23 in a place where the player does not normally operate the buttons such as the lower plate unit 15, the player can be made aware that the notification button 23 is a special button. In addition, if the operation button 51 is provided with the notification button 23, the person who originally played the game is away from the seat, while the other person casually operates the notification button 23 to perform the on-and-hold variation effects. Even if you try to check if there is a fluctuating production that will be a big hit, you have to reach out near the operation handle 51, so that the appearance is conspicuous to the players and hall related people around, so The operation of the notification button 23 can be hesitant.

  In the above embodiment, the notification button 23 is configured as a push-down button, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any configuration may be used as long as it is a means operated by the player. For example, it may be configured by a sensor that senses contact of a human hand, or may be configured by an operation lever. Further, it may be constituted by a slide type switch. The slide type switch may be a switch biased in one direction. In this case, it may be configured to notify the presence of a jackpot when the player has been slid in a direction opposite to the biasing direction for a predetermined time or more.

  Moreover, you may give the role of the notification button 23 to the button which has another function. For example, if the frame button 22 is continuously pressed for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) or more, and there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed and on hold, a jackpot notification image or a variation time notification An image may be displayed. Further, when a notification mode selection screen is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 and the notification mode is selected by the player, if there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the running and pending variation effects, You may display a notification image and a change time notification image.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed and notification based on the pressing operation (presence of jackpot presence) is started, the notification is performed for 5 seconds regardless of whether or not the notification button 23 is subsequently pressed. However, instead of this, when the notification button 23 is pressed and a notification based on the pressing operation (a notification of the presence of a jackpot) is started, the notification button 23 is continuously pressed. The notification may be performed while the notification is being performed, and when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 ends, the notification may be ended. Thereby, the notice can be terminated by the player's intention. Moreover, it can suppress that this notification continues being performed more than necessary, and can suppress the possibility that a person other than the player knows whether or not there is a jackpot.

  In the above embodiment, when there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or being held based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, a jackpot notification image is displayed, and a ball to the game area is displayed. In the case where it is determined that the launching of is stopped, the case where the variable time notification image is displayed together with the jackpot notification image has been described. On the other hand, when the notification button 23 is pressed, even if there is no variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect that is being executed or on hold, it is determined that the launch of the ball to the game area is stopped. Sometimes, it may be configured to display the variation time of each variation effect (the remaining variation time in the variation effect being executed). As a result, regardless of whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit, a variation time notification image is displayed, so even if someone other than the player visually recognizes the variation time notification image, whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit to other people Can be prevented from being known.

  In the above embodiment, when the announcement button 23 is pressed, and there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or on hold, the variation time notification image displayed together with the jackpot notification image Explained the case of displaying the variation time of each variation effect that is executed until the last big win (the remaining variation time in the variation effect being executed), but the variation time notification image is the latest big hit It is also possible to display the variation time of the variation effect being executed and the variation times of all the variation effects that are on hold, including the subsequent variation effect. In this case, the change time notification command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 includes information indicating the change time of the change effect being executed and the change times of all the change effects that are on hold. It may be a thing. Thereby, the player can know not only the time until the last big win, but also the time until all the variation effects held at that time are executed after the big win. Therefore, the player can determine when to leave the seat or finish the business, including not only the time until the last jackpot but also the time required for the fluctuating production after the jackpot.

  Further, in the change time notification image, the time from the time until the last big hit can be displayed. For example, in the case where the number of holdings is a big hit in the two-time variation effect, the remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed, the variation time of the variation effect with the number of hold times of one, and the variation effect with the number of hold times of two times You may display as a time until it becomes a big hit in the last time which totaled the fluctuation time. As a result, the player can grasp at a glance the time until the big hit, without adding up the fluctuation time of each fluctuation production, so it is possible to make a quicker determination of whether there is time to leave or finish the business. it can.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when there is a variation effect which becomes a big hit in the variation effect under execution or on hold based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the variation time displayed together with the jackpot notification image Although the notification image is displayed, in this case, only the jackpot notification image may be displayed and the variable time notification image may not be displayed. In this case, the player cannot know the time until the jackpot, but can know the presence or absence of the jackpot, so if the player wants to leave the seat or complete the action, the act is immediately It can be determined whether or not it can be executed.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, if there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed and on hold, a jackpot notification image is displayed, and further, a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, the case where the change time notification image is displayed has been described. Instead, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, each variation of the pending variation effect is determined regardless of whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or on hold. The time may be displayed. In this case, the player cannot know whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effects being executed and on hold, but can know each variation time of the variation effect on hold. Some fluctuating productions can take several minutes due to special reach. The player knows each variation time of the pending variation effect, and can make a determination to leave the seat or perform a task while such a variation effect with a long variation time is being executed. In this case, the remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed may be displayed together with each variation time of the pending variation effect. Thereby, when the remaining variation time of the variation effect being executed is long, the player can make a decision to leave the seat or complete the business during that time.

  In addition, when the variation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed), the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. Even if not, after that, it is assumed that there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (there is no holding of a new variation effect), each variation time of the variation effect on hold is calculated, and the variation time announcement is made. An image may be displayed. As a result, even if ball launching to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to predict to some extent the time until the player wins a big hit and determine whether or not there is time to leave or finish the business. Can do. In this case, while ball launching is not stopped, characters such as “(expected)” are written on the right side of each variation time of the variation effect that is displayed on the variation time notification image, The character of each variation time of the variation time may be darkened so as to indicate to the player that each value is based on an assumption. If it is determined that ball launch has been stopped, the character “(expected)” is erased, or the brightness of the character is displayed brightly, and the pending time displayed on the variable time notification image is displayed. You may show so that a player may understand that each variation time of a variation effect is an exact value.

  When the notification button 23 is pressed in the case where the variation time is determined according to the number of held balls at the time when execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed) If it is determined that a ball has been launched into the game area, the pre-read information in the pre-read information storage area 223b is stored in each of the pre-read information first to fourth areas as the variation time of each variation effect on hold. Of the variation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the shortest variation time may be calculated to display a variation time notification image. In this case, while ball launching is not stopped, a character such as “or more” may be written to the right of each variation time of the variation effect on hold displayed on the variation time notification image. This makes it possible to determine the shortest variation time for each variation effect that is on hold even if ball launching to the game area has not been stopped. Can do.

  In addition, when the variation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the fluctuating effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed), in particular, the number of held balls at that time is When there is a tendency that the variation time tends to be shortened when there are many, if it is determined that the ball is not being launched into the game area when the notification button 23 is pressed, the variation time notification is made. In the image, not only the variation time (current variation time) of each variation effect in the case where the state where ball launching is stopped is maintained, but also the first prefetch information in the prefetch information storage area 223b for each variation effect. The shortest variation time (shortest variation time) among the variation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls is calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each of the fourth areas. Time and may display the shortest change time together. In this case, for the shortest variation time, a character such as “above” may be written on the right side. Thus, if the player performs ball launching in the variation production executed until the variation production having the shortest variation time enough to complete the leaving or business based on the current variation time and the shortest variation time, You can see how much the fluctuation time is shortened, so for example, by launching a ball, you can quickly execute the fluctuation production with the shortest fluctuation time enough to finish leaving and the message, and leave the message and the message It is possible to make the player make a decision to finish it quickly.

  In the above embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed and on hold, and the ball launching to the game area is stopped. The case where the variable time notification image is displayed under the above conditions has been described. Instead, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, if there is a variation effect that is being executed or is pending, or if there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the pending variation effect, it is combined with the jackpot notification image. Alternatively, instead of the jackpot notification image, a variation time notification image may be displayed regardless of the stop of the ball launch. Thereby, the player can grasp that there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or on hold, or the variation effect on hold, and can know the variation time of each variation effect. The player can make a decision to leave the seat or complete the business by knowing the presence of the jackpot and the variation time of each variation effect.

  In addition, when the variation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed), the launch of the ball into the game area is stopped. Even if not, after that, it is assumed that there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (there is no holding of a new variation effect), each variation time of the variation effect on hold is calculated, and the variation time announcement is made. An image may be displayed. As a result, even if ball launching to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to predict to some extent the time until the player wins a big hit and determine whether or not there is time to leave or finish the business. Can do. In this case, while ball launching is not stopped, characters such as “(expected)” are written on the right side of each variation time of the variation effect that is displayed on the variation time notification image, The character of each variation time of the variation time may be darkened so as to indicate to the player that each value is based on an assumption. If it is determined that ball launch has been stopped, the character “(expected)” is erased, or the brightness of the character is displayed brightly, and the pending time displayed on the variable time notification image is displayed. You may show so that a player may understand that each variation time of a variation effect is an exact value.

  When the notification button 23 is pressed in the case where the variation time is determined according to the number of held balls at the time when execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed) If it is determined that a ball has been launched into the game area, the pre-read information in the pre-read information storage area 223b is stored in each of the pre-read information first to fourth areas as the variation time of each variation effect on hold. Of the variation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the shortest variation time may be calculated to display a variation time notification image. In this case, while ball launching is not stopped, a character such as “or more” may be written to the right of each variation time of the variation effect on hold displayed on the variation time notification image. This makes it possible to determine the shortest variation time for each variation effect that is on hold even if ball launching to the game area has not been stopped. Can do.

  In addition, when the variation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the fluctuating effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed), in particular, the number of held balls at that time is When there is a tendency that the variation time tends to be shortened when there are many, if it is determined that the ball is not being launched into the game area when the notification button 23 is pressed, the variation time notification is made. In the image, not only the variation time (current variation time) of each variation effect in the case where the state where ball launching is stopped is maintained, but also the first prefetch information in the prefetch information storage area 223b for each variation effect. The shortest variation time (shortest variation time) among the variation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls is calculated based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in each of the fourth areas. Time and may display the shortest change time together. In this case, for the shortest variation time, a character such as “above” may be written on the right side. Thus, if the player performs ball launching in the variation production executed until the variation production having the shortest variation time enough to complete the leaving or business based on the current variation time and the shortest variation time, You can see how much the fluctuation time is shortened, so for example, by launching a ball, you can quickly execute the fluctuation production with the shortest fluctuation time enough to finish leaving and the message, and leave the message and the message It is possible to make the player make a decision to finish it quickly.

  In the above embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, if there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or on hold, a jackpot notification image is displayed, and further, a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, the case where the change time notification image is displayed has been described. Instead, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, if there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the running or pending variation production, the time until the big hit is displayed. Also good. Since the player can grasp the time until the big hit by making a predetermined pressing operation on the notification button 23, the player decides to stop the game and finish the seat or the business until the big hit This is advantageous in that the player can easily make the game. In this case, if there is no variation effect that is a big hit in the pending variation effect, the notification may not be executed. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined pressing operation of the notification button 23, if the notification is not performed, it can be grasped that at least the on-the-fly variation effect will not be a big hit. Can make a decision to complete the process. Further, if there is no change effect that is a big hit in the change effect being executed or on hold, the notification may not be executed. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined pressing operation on the notification button 23, if the notification is not performed, it can be understood that not only the pending variation effect but also the variation effect being executed will not be a big hit. Thus, it is possible to make a determination to immediately leave or complete the business without waiting for the running dynamic effect to end.

  In addition, when the variation time is determined according to the number of held balls at the time when the execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed), the ball launching into the game area is stopped. Even if it is not, the time until the big hit may be calculated and displayed on the assumption that there is no winning at the first entrance 64 (there is no holding of a new variation effect). As a result, even if ball launching to the game area is not stopped, it is possible to predict to some extent the time until the player wins a big hit and determine whether or not there is time to leave or finish the business. Can do. In this case, while the ball is not stopped, the letters “(expected)” are written on the right side of the time until the big hit displayed on the variable time notification image, or the big hit The character of time may be darkened so that the player can know that each value is based on an assumption. If it is determined that the ball has been stopped, the character “(expected)” is deleted, or the brightness of the character is displayed brightly, and the time until the big hit is an accurate value. It may be shown so that the player knows that there is.

  When the notification button 23 is pressed in the case where the variation time is determined according to the number of held balls at the time when execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed) If it is determined that a ball has been launched into the game area, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the pre-read information storage area 223b are used for each of the suspended variation effects. After calculating the shortest variation time among the variation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls, the shortest time until the big hit can be calculated and displayed. In this case, while ball launching is not stopped, characters such as “above” may be written on the right side of the time until the big hit. This makes it possible to know at least how long it takes for the player to win a big hit even if the ball is not stopped in the game area, so it is possible to determine whether there is time to leave or complete the business. be able to.

  In addition, when the variation time is determined according to the number of reserved balls at the time when the execution of the fluctuating effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed), in particular, the number of held balls at that time is If there is a tendency that the variation time tends to be shortened if there are many, if it is determined that the ball has been stopped in the game area when the notification button 23 is pressed, In addition to the time until the big hit (the time until the current big hit) when the state where the stoppage is stopped is maintained, it is stored in the prefetch information storage area 223b for each of the suspended variation effects. After calculating the shortest variation time among the variation times that can be determined according to the number of reserved balls based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, it becomes a big hit together with the time until the current big hit. The shortest may display the time in. In this case, for the shortest time until the big hit, characters such as “above” may be written on the right side. As a result, if the player feels that the time to hit the big hit is long based on the time to hit the current big hit, how much time to hit the big hit if the ball is launched It can be grasped based on the shortest time until the big hit. Therefore, for example, it is possible to cause the player to make a decision to leave the seat or complete the business after the ball is hit and the jackpot is quickly established.

  In the above embodiment, if the player has left the seat or a message based on the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, what kind of effect is given while the player is leaving or the message has been completed. The player cannot know what was done. However, there are some players who are paying attention to what kind of performance is performed on the pachinko machine 10. For example, when a player starts a game, a password issued by a manufacturer or the like is input to the gaming machine, and when the game is finished, a two-dimensional code including information such as a gaming history is displayed on the gaming machine side. There is a gaming machine having a function of causing a player's portable terminal to read the game history and registering the game history in a server such as a manufacturer. In such a gaming machine, the game history includes the history of effects performed on the game machine, and based on the history of the effects, special content can be downloaded to the player's mobile terminal, or in the next game There are things that give a special privilege to the player by causing the game machine to execute a special effect, and the player pays attention to what kind of effect has been performed on the game machine. Therefore, after the notification button 23 is pressed down, a history of effects performed in the pachinko machine 10 during a predetermined period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the player can know the effect performed on the pachinko machine 10 while leaving the seat or completing the business. Therefore, the player can leave the seat and do business with peace of mind. The production history may display what production has been performed for each variation production executed after the notification button 23 is pressed. Thereby, the player can know the performed effect in detail. Further, when a predetermined effect is executed, the fact that the effect has been executed may be displayed. Thereby, the presence or absence of execution of the effect which the player is paying attention to can be easily known. Regarding the start of the display of the history of performance, after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, by pressing the operation button 22 or the notification button 23 at the timing when the player intends to leave the seat or start the business, Display of the history of effects may be started. Thereby, it is possible to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a history of effects executed after the player has at least looked away from the pachinko machine 10. Further, when the notification button 23 is pressed down a predetermined time, display of the production history may be started unconditionally. As a result, even if the player does not leave the table as a result, the display of the production history is started, but the display of the production history can be started with simple control. On the other hand, regarding the end of the display of the production history, the player may be caused to press the operation button 22 or the notification button 23 in order to end the display of the production history. Thereby, it is possible to continue displaying the production history based on the player's intention, and to erase the display. Further, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the notification button 23 was pressed, the display of the production history may be terminated. Thereby, the display of the history of effects can be ended with simple control.

  In the above-described embodiment, when it is determined whether or not the ball launch into the game area is stopped as one of the conditions for displaying the variable time notification image, when the ball launched into the game area is discharged to the outside. It is determined whether or not there is a state in which there is no entry to the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the specific winning opening 65a, and the out opening 66, which is a mouth passing through the The case where it is determined whether or not the ball has been thrown into the game area has been described if the ball has not entered for more than 5 seconds. However, the method for determining whether or not the ball has been launched into the game area has been described. Is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the firing handle 51 is input to the sound lamp control device 113 and the player releases the hand from the firing handle 51, the output of the touch sensor 51a changes from on to off. When the predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, it is determined that the ball has been launched into the game area, and the player has operated the firing handle 51 so that the output of the touch sensor 51a is turned on from off. It may be determined that the ball has been launched into the game area when the change is made. In addition, a sensor for detecting a ball guided to the upper part of the game area from a ball guide passage (see FIG. 2) formed by the two rails 61 and 62 is provided at the front end portion of the inner rail 61, and the sensor detects the ball for a predetermined time. If the ball is not detected, it may be determined that the ball has been launched into the game area, and if the ball is detected by the sensor, it may be determined that the ball has been launched into the game area. The sensor may be, for example, a sensor that detects the opening / closing of the return ball prevention member 68 attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61, and the return ball prevention member 68 is opened from the ball guide passage to the upper part of the game area. When the game is guided, the ball guided to the upper part of the game area may be detected by detecting the open state of the return ball prevention member 68.

  In the above-described embodiment, when a notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, the operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, including the suspended portion (the variation effect suspended after the invalid setting is made). The case where the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 is canceled when the execution of all the variation effects is finished and the variation effect on hold becomes 0 has been described. Instead of this, the timing for canceling the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 is changed, and the pending change effect (that is, the prefetching performed in the prefetching processing performed when the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed) When the execution of the variation effect held when the prefetching process is executed is finished, even if there is a pending variation effect (even if there is a variation effect suspended after the prefetching process), the notification button 23 The invalidation of the operation may be canceled. As a result, at least until the execution of the pending variation effect in which the presence or absence of the variation effect that is a big hit in the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is determined by the pre-reading process is ended, the notification button 23 Therefore, it is possible to make it impossible for a person other than the player to grasp whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the pending variation effect. On the other hand, when the execution of the pending variation effect is completed, the presence or absence of the variation effect that is a big hit when performing the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is determined by the pre-read process, the player again presses the notification button 23. By pressing, it is possible to determine whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect that has been put on hold after the look-ahead process. It is possible to have many opportunities to grasp whether or not there is a fluctuating production.

  In addition, the timing for canceling the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 may be a case where a winning to the first entrance 64 is detected. As a result, the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is disabled after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is performed until the next winning of the ball at the first entrance 64 is detected. Therefore, if the player stops the ball launching and performs a predetermined pressing operation on the notification button 23 and obtains a notification based on the pressing operation, the player restarts the game (ball launching). It is possible to make it impossible for a person other than the player to grasp whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the pending variation effect. On the other hand, when the player resumes the game and a winning of a ball at the first entrance 64 is detected, the player presses the notification button 23 again to enter the first entrance 64. It is possible to newly determine whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the suspended variation effects. Further, after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is performed, the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 can be canceled simply by monitoring the presence or absence of the ball entering the first ball slot 64, so that the control is easy. Can be done.

  Further, in addition to the above-described embodiment and the above-described modifications, the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 is canceled at the timing when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or when the jackpot effect ends. Also good. When a player confirms the presence of a fluctuating effect that is a big hit by a notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the player may continue the game until the big hit is reached without leaving or doing a business. Then, at the stage where the jackpot effect is finished, there may be a pending variation effect left. By releasing the invalidation of the operation of the notification button 23 at the timing when the jackpot symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or when the jackpot presentation is finished, Can confirm whether or not there is a variation effect that becomes a big hit in the pending variation effect at the stage when the jackpot ends. Therefore, after the jackpot, the player can determine again whether or not the player can immediately perform the action of leaving the seat or completing the business at that stage.

  In the above embodiment, when a notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, if the operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, even if a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23 until the invalidation is canceled. Although the case where the notification is not executed has been described, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23 during the period when the operation of the notification button 23 is invalid, an image different from the jackpot notification image or the like is displayed. May be. For example, the boy's hair HB is displayed in red or the boy's hair HB remains black, regardless of whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the running and pending variation effects. The color may be displayed in gold, or an image different from the jackpot notification image (image in which the boy's hair HB is gold) may be displayed. As a result, after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, during the period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalidated, a strange image different from the jackpot notification image or the like is displayed. Therefore, when a player leaves the gaming machine in accordance with the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, only a strange image is displayed even if a person other than the player presses the notification button 23, so that game It can be confusing and irritating to others. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another player from obtaining the jackpot profit obtained by the fluctuating effect held by the game of the person who originally played the game, and to protect the profit of the person who originally played the game. .

  In the above-described embodiment, a case has been described where, when the notification button 23 is pressed, whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effects being executed and on hold is described. On the other hand, when a player starts playing a game, the password issued by the manufacturer or the like is input to the gaming machine, and when the game is ended, information such as gaming history is included on the gaming machine side. There is a gaming machine that has a function of displaying a dimension code, causing a player's portable terminal to read the code, and registering the gaming history in a server such as a manufacturer. In such a gaming machine, the notification button 23 is pressed only after a password is entered at the start of the game until a two-dimensional code including information such as a game history at the end of the game is displayed. The operation may be regarded as valid, and it may be notified whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effects being executed or on hold. In this case, the display of the two-dimensional code including information such as a game history associated with the end of the jackpot may be possible even while the variation effect is being performed. As a result, when the game is started by entering the password, the notification button 23 is pressed, and after the notification based on the pressing operation is executed, the two-dimensional code accompanying the end of the game can be displayed on the gaming machine. For example, even if the player leaves the seat during the execution of the variation effect, if another person presses the notification button 23 and there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or on hold. You can make it impossible to grasp.

  Also, when starting a game, enter the password that the player considered, and when ending the game, configure the gaming machine to input the password entered at the start, and enter the password at the start of the game The operation of pressing the notification button 23 is regarded as valid only after the password is entered until the password is entered at the end of the game, and there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effects being executed and on hold. You may make it announce whether or not. In this case, the input of the password accompanying the end of the jackpot may be possible even while the fluctuating effect is being performed. As a result, if the player who started the game by inputting the password presses the notification button 23 and executes the notification based on the pressing operation, if the password associated with the end of the game is input, then the variable effect Even if the player leaves the seat during the performance of another, it is difficult for other people to press the notification button 23 to grasp whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or on hold. can do.

  In the above embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed during the period when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalid, any of the third symbol display device 81, the illumination units 29 to 33, the display lamp 34, etc. In this case, some kind of notification may be performed. As a result, if the person who originally played the game presses the notification button 23 while another person leaves the seat by a notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, the person who originally played the game When returning to, it is possible to know that another person has pressed the notification button 23. Therefore, it is possible to prevent another person from pressing the notification button 23. Further, an alarm sound may be generated when the notification button 23 is pressed a predetermined number of times or more during a period in which the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalid. As a result, during the period when the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is invalid, the notification button 23 is pressed more than a predetermined number of times to notify the person who was originally playing the game or the hall personnel. Therefore, it is possible to prevent others from pressing the notification button 23.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, when there exists pressing operation of the notification button 23, you may notify that to the hall computer provided outside the pachinko machine 10. Thereby, since the pressing operation state of the notification button 23 can be grasped by the hall computer, the hall related person can grasp when the strange notification button 23 is depressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the jackpot notification image is displayed when there is a variation effect that is a jackpot in the running and pending variation effects has been described, but when the jackpot notification image is displayed, the jackpot type is It may be displayed so that it can be understood. For example, in the 2R probability variation jackpot, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is often performed in a very short time, and the jackpot period ends immediately, and it is extremely rare for the ball to win the specific winning opening 65a. Some players are willing to leave or deal with a 2R probable big hit. In addition, if the jackpot notification image is displayed, the type of jackpot cannot be grasped, it is possible to wait without leaving or doing a business until the jackpot is reached, and if it becomes 2R probable jackpot after all, it should have been done. Some players feel that. On the other hand, when displaying the jackpot notification image, if it is displayed so that the jackpot type can be understood, it is possible to grasp the jackpot type at the time of the jackpot, so the player takes into account the jackpot type, You can decide whether to leave or complete a business.

  In the above embodiment, the case where a jackpot notification image, a variation time notification image, etc. are displayed when there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effects being executed and on hold has been described. The case of displaying an image or the like may be limited to a case where there is a jackpot that is a predetermined jackpot type in the running effects and on-hold variation effects, or in the pending variation effects. For example, when there are fluctuating effects that are 15R-probable big hits or 15R normal big hits in running and pending fluctuating effects, or in fluctuating effects that are on hold, a jackpot notification image or a variable time notification image Etc., and even if there is a fluctuating effect that becomes 2R probability variation jackpot, the jackpot notification image, the variation time notification image, etc. may be hidden. As a result, the player presses the notification button 23 to display the notification image when the player stops the game and wants to leave the seat, or when he / she wants to complete a message such as a phone call or email. Whether or not there is a variation effect that is at least a jackpot of a predetermined jackpot type (in the above example, 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot) among the running variation effect and the pending variation effect. Can be confirmed. Therefore, if there is no fluctuating effect that becomes a big hit of the predetermined jackpot type, the player can make a determination to stop the game immediately in order to perform an action such as leaving or completing a business. Further, if there is a fluctuating effect that is a big hit of a predetermined jackpot type, the player can make a determination to continue the game until the big hit. In other words, the notification button 23 can determine whether or not the player can immediately perform the action when he / she wants to leave the seat or complete the business. In particular, in the 2R probability variation jackpot, as described above, the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a is often performed in a very short time, and the jackpot period ends immediately, and it is extremely difficult for the ball to win the specific winning opening 65a. Since it is rare, there are many players who want to leave or deal with a 2R probability change jackpot. Even if there is a 2R probability variation jackpot in the running and pending variation effects, or in the pending variation effect, if the jackpot notification image or the variation time notification image is not displayed, the 2R probability variation jackpot Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from waiting without leaving the seat or doing business.

  In addition, even if there is a 2R probability variation jackpot in the running effect and on-hold variation effect, or in the pending variation effect, if the jackpot notification image, the variation time notification image, etc. are not displayed, While the person leaves the table, there is a possibility that the 2R probability variation jackpot will be displayed and a screen (background image or the like) corresponding to the high probability state (probability variation state) may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In other words, a player may unexpectedly change his / her probability while he / she is away from the player. It will raise the suspicion that it may have gone. On the other hand, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, there is no 15R probability variation big hit or 15R normal big hit in the running and pending variation effects or in the pending variation effects. If there is a 2R probability variation jackpot, a probability variation transition notification image for notifying the transition to the high probability state may be displayed for a predetermined time. As the probability change transition notification image, the effect image itself displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when developing into the high probability state may be used. As a result, the player can grasp that there is a 2R probability variation jackpot in the running and on-hold variation effects, or in the on-hold variation effects, and the transition (transition) to the high probability state. Even if the screen corresponding to the high probability state is displayed when returning after leaving the seat, it is possible to grasp that this is caused by the variation effect being executed or being held before leaving. Therefore, it can suppress giving a player the above doubts.

  In addition, when a notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, if there is a 2R probability variation jackpot in the variation effect being executed and on hold or in the change effect on hold, Even if the 2R probability variation jackpot is established, a screen corresponding to a high probability state is not displayed, and a sufficient predetermined time has elapsed since the player has left the seat after returning from the 2R probability variation jackpot. After that, a screen corresponding to the high probability state may be displayed. If a screen corresponding to a high-probability state is displayed after a player who has left the seat based on a notification based on a press operation of the notification button 23 returns to the seat, it is executed when the press operation of the notification button 23 is performed. It is possible to let the player know that there was a 2R probability change jackpot in the middle and on-hold variation production, or in the pending variation production, and others can play while they are leaving It is possible to suppress the suspicion that he or she has gone without permission. Even if the player leaves the seat, even if the 2R probability change jackpot becomes a high probability state, the screen corresponding to the high probability state is not displayed until the player returns, so that the high probability state is displayed to others. It is possible not to know that it is.

  In addition, when a notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is executed, if there is a 2R probability variation jackpot in the variation effect being executed and on hold or in the change effect on hold, Even if the 2R probability variation jackpot is established, a screen corresponding to the high probability state is not displayed, and then the probability is high when the notification button 23 is pressed down or when the frame button 22 is pressed down. You may make it display the screen according to a state. As a result, while the player is leaving based on the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, when the notification is executed, the variation effect being executed and on hold or the change effect being held on hold 2R probability variation jackpot is established, the player who has returned to the seat performs a predetermined pressing operation on the notification button 23 again, or the player presses the assumed pressing operation on the frame button 22 By performing the above, it is possible to display an image corresponding to the high probability state. That is, if the player returns to the seat and performs a predetermined pressing operation on the notification button 23 again, or if the player does not perform an assumed pressing operation on the frame button 22, an image corresponding to the high probability state is displayed. Although not displayed, if an image corresponding to the effect shoe state is displayed when the player returns to the seat, it means that another person has pressed the notification button 23 or the frame button 22. Therefore, it is possible to know that another person has operated the pachinko machine 10 while the player is leaving, in other words, it is possible to prevent others from operating the pachinko machine 10 without permission.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 is performed, the fluctuating effect is executed as usual. Instead, when the predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, the holding is suspended. If it is determined that there is no variation effect that is a big hit in the middle variation effect (that is, all the pending variation effects will be missed), and if the jackpot notification image or the like is not displayed, at least for that notification With respect to the fluctuating effects that are subject to prefetching, it is possible not to perform effects that improve the expectation that is a big hit. When the jackpot notification image or the like is not displayed even though the notification button 23 is pressed down, it means that there is no variation effect that is a big hit in the running effect and the pending change effect at the time of the pressing operation. The player can know. Therefore, even though it is known that the player does not win a big game, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming white by performing an effect that improves the expectation of winning a big game. In addition, by not performing an effect that improves the expectation that will be a big hit, it is possible to suppress the operation of the accessory or the like without meaning, and thus it is possible to suppress the life of the gaming machine from being shortened. As a result of the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, when the display of the jackpot notification image or the like is not performed, only in a situation where the ball is not fired into the game area, at least pre-reading for the notification It may be made not to perform the production which improves the expectation which becomes a big hit about the variation production which became the object of. As a result, when a ball has been launched into the game area, an effect of improving the expectation of a big hit can be achieved even if a big hit notification image or the like is not displayed by a notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23. Since it is performed, the player can be given a sense of expectation that will be a big hit with a fluctuating performance performed based on the fact that the ball has won the first entrance 64 after the notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23. , Can enhance the interest in gaming. In the case of executing the variation effect so as not to perform the effect of improving the expectation that is a big hit, the symbol may be confirmed and displayed after the high-speed variation is executed by simply knowing the determined variation time. As a result, the fluctuating effect can be executed with simple control so as not to perform the effect of improving the expectation that is a big hit. In addition, when a variation effect is executed so as not to produce an effect that improves the expectation of winning, an animation, a drama, a music video, or the like may be reproduced within a predetermined variation time. The player can relieve dissatisfaction with the long-time variation effect by watching these animations and the like, although it is known that the player will be out of play.

  In the above embodiment, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, at that time, a so-called one-shot notification effect (an effect that notifies that the expected degree of jackpot is 100%) is made. In the case where there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the running and pending variation effects, the jackpot notification image or the like may be hidden. Because it is possible to let the player know that it will be a big hit with a single announcement effect, it is not necessary to display the big hit notification image, etc. Dare to display the big hit notification image etc. The player can be concentrated on

  In the above embodiment, the case where the pre-reading process is performed by the voice lamp control device 113 has been described. However, every time there is a winning (starting winning) at the first entrance 64, the first control acquired by the main control device 110. When a value such as the random number counter C1 per 1 is pre-readed to determine whether or not a big win will be determined, the determination result is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the notification button 23 is pressed down. Based on the determination result of the prefetch process received from the control device 110, it may be determined whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or on hold. In addition, when the main control device 110 performs a lottery lottery for a variation effect to be executed in the future, the value of the first random number counter C1 or the like that is on hold is also read in advance, and the variation effect to be executed and the variation that is pending It is determined whether or not there is a fluctuating effect that is a big hit in the effect, and the determination result is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In the sound lamp control device 113, when the notification button 23 is pressed, Based on the determination result transmitted from the main control device 110, control may be performed to notify whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed or on hold.

  Further, the prefetch process may be executed by the display control device 114. For example, information for performing a prefetch process, that is, a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type acquired from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 upon starting winning A pre-read information storage area similar to that shown in FIG. 8 for storing each value of the counter CS1 is provided in the display control device 114, and is stored in the pre-read information storage area when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, the display control device 114 executes prefetch processing, and it is determined that there is a variation effect that is a big hit among the variation effect being executed and the variation effect being held. In that case, a jackpot notification image may be displayed. In this case, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 may transmit the reserved ball number command as it is to the display control device 114 as the display reserved ball number command. As a result, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired by the main control device 110 in accordance with the start winning prize are stored in the prefetch information first to fourth areas provided in the prefetch information storage area of the display control device 114. Of these, it can be stored in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls in the display reserved ball number command. The display control device 114 may execute a shift process similar to the process of S1103 in FIG. 24 on the prefetch information storage area every time a display variation pattern command is received. Thereby, the same value as each counter C1-C3 and CS1 stored in the reservation ball | bowl execution area 203c of the main control apparatus 110 is stored in the prefetch information 0th area provided in the prefetch information storage area of the display control apparatus 114. In the pre-read information first to fourth areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b of the main controller 110, respectively. Can be stored.

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  When the sound lamp control device and the display control device are configured as a single control device, the RAM included in the single control device is provided with a pre-read information storage area similar to that shown in FIG. When the reserved ball number command is received, the pre-read information first to fourth areas provided in the pre-read information storage area are assigned to the reserved ball number command in the area corresponding to the pre-read hold number of the hold ball number command. The included counter values C1 to C3 and CS1 may be stored. One control device may execute a shift process similar to the process of S1103 in FIG. 24 between the pre-read information 0th to fourth areas every time a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. Then, when a predetermined pressing operation is performed on the notification button 23, one control device may execute a prefetch process based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the prefetch information storage area. .

  In the above embodiment, when the notification button 23 is pressed, a case has been described in which whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the variation effect being executed and on hold is described. May be notified of whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit in the pending variation effect. As a result, the player can determine whether or not the player may immediately perform an action of leaving the seat or completing the business after the execution of the variation effect being executed. In addition, when the notification button 23 is pressed, the pre-reading process is executed only for the fluctuating effects up to the predetermined number of times (for example, two times), and the fluctuating effect being executed and the number of holds are the predetermined number of times. Announce whether there is a variation effect that is a big hit in a variation effect within (for example, 2 times) or a variation effect within a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) except for the variation effect being executed. May be. In this way, if the player can leave the seat in a short time or if the business is completed immediately, at least if there is no fluctuating production where the number of holdings is a big hit within the predetermined number of times, the seat is left or the requirement is completed. The player can make a determination to try. In addition, when the notification button 23 is pressed, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that a big hit will be made within a predetermined time (for example, 2 minutes) by the prefetching process, and an announcement is made so that the determination result can be understood. Also good. Thereby, the player can grasp whether or not there is a possibility that the player will win a jackpot within 2 minutes, and based on this, the player can decide whether to leave the seat or finish the business.

  In the above embodiment, when the jackpot notification command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display lamp control device 114, the display control device 114 displays the jackpot notification image based on the content indicated by the jackpot notification command. The case where the jackpot notification image data and the jackpot hold image data are developed by the setting process (S1906, see FIG. 37B) has been described. On the other hand, an additional data table for displaying the jackpot notification image corresponding to the jackpot notification command is prepared in the additional data table storage area 232b, and when the display control device 114 receives the jackpot notification command, the jackpot notification command is prepared. By reading the additional data table corresponding to the command from the additional data table 232b and setting it in the additional data table buffer 233b, it is added to the image displayed according to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, and the jackpot notification You may comprise so that an image may be displayed.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the change time notification command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display lamp control device 114, the display control device 114 changes based on the content indicated by the change time notification command. The case where the image data for changing time notification is developed by the time notification image setting process (S1908, see FIG. 38B) has been described. On the other hand, an additional data table for displaying the variable time notification image is prepared in the additional data table storage area 232b, and when the display control device 114 receives the variable time notification command, it responds to the variable time notification command. The additional data table to be read is read from the additional data table 232b and set in the additional data table buffer 233b, so that it is added to the image displayed according to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233a, and the variable time notification image is displayed. You may comprise so that it may display.

  In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the case where the fluctuation start flag is always set to ON if a stop type command is received has been described. When the stop type command is received after the occurrence of the error, the fluctuation start flag may be set to ON. Thereby, when there is no reception of the variation pattern command and the stop type command is received, it is possible to suppress the strange variation effect from being executed.

  Further, the fluctuation start flag may be set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, a display for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command based on the variation start flag being turned on. A variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. This causes the display control device 114 to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. Can do. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command. You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. FIG. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

  In the above embodiment, whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol that is held and executed upon entering the first entrance 64 (start prize) is determined by the player. The case where the player is notified by notification based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 has been described. On the other hand, when the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (start winning prize), it is held in a variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) that is held and executed (stopped at the symbol “○”). In accordance with whether or not there is a variation effect that is a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol by an announcement based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 by the player, or instead of The player may be notified. As a result, whether there is a variation display that is a hit in the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) being held, or in the variation display of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) being executed and pending The player can grasp whether or not. Therefore, when the player wants to leave the seat or finish the business, the notice button 23 can determine whether or not the action may be immediately executed. Among gaming machines, there are those that increase the gameability by the presence or absence of normal symbols, and are particularly effective in such gaming machines. In this case, based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23, in addition to the presence / absence notification, or instead of the presence / absence notification, each variable time of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) is displayed, It is also possible to display the time until. In addition, the above-described modification shown for the notification regarding the variation effect of the third symbol based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 can be applied to the notification regarding the variation effect of the second symbol (ordinary symbol).

  In the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the drawing content for adding and displaying the continuous notice effect that is not normally displayed in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the additional data table. The additional data table is not limited to various effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. The drawing content for drawing may be defined. Further, in the additional data table, the drawing contents necessary for adding and displaying an image that is not normally displayed with respect to one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main controller 110. In addition to prescribing or in addition to prescribing such drawing content, the drawing content necessary to change part or all of the tone of the one production or display in one production The drawing content necessary for changing the displayed image to be displayed may be predetermined.

  In the case where the additional data table defines the drawing contents necessary for changing part or all of the color tone in one production, the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the additional data table. Corresponding to an address expressed as a unit of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment), the type of sprite whose color tone is changed at that time, and color information specifying the changed color tone of that sprite. It may be specified. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional drawing content specified in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. Color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a is added. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table. Such an additional data table may be prepared for displaying the jackpot notification image, and for example, the color of the boy's hair HB may be changed from the color defined by the display data table.

  In addition, when the additional data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the additional data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the additional drawing content defined in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233b. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233c in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233a Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed. Such an additional data table is prepared for displaying the jackpot notification image. For example, as a jackpot notification image, the boy displayed in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81 is replaced with another character. Also good.

  In the above embodiment, in the display control device 314, in addition to the display data table that defines the rendering content of the base effect (for example, the variable effect), rendering of the effect (for example, the continuous notice effect) that is additionally displayed The case where the additional data table defining the contents is set and the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233c is acquired from each data table has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a base effect (for example, When the display of an effect (for example, a continuous notice effect) that is displayed in addition to the change effect is determined, the display is added to the display data table corresponding to the effect that is the base. A new display data table is created by adding the drawing contents of the additional data table corresponding to the production to be performed for each address indicating the display time. Generated, based on the new display data tables, may be acquired drawing content of the image. Thereby, it is possible to easily display an effect that is displayed in addition to the effect that is the base. In addition, for each type of the base effect, a display data table that defines the rendering contents of only the base effect, and display data that defines the image content that overlaps the effect displayed in addition to the base effect Since it is not necessary to have a table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of data tables. In addition, since the drawing contents can be specified using only the newly created display data table, the processing required for the specification is compared with the case where the drawing contents are specified from the display data table and the additional data table. Can be lightened.

  If it is determined that an effect to be displayed in addition to the base effect is to be displayed, the display data table corresponding to the base effect is used as it is, and the drawing content of the image is acquired. May be.

  In addition, in the display data table, in addition to the rendering content of the base effect (for example, the variable effect), the rendering content additionally displayed (for example, the continuous notice effect) is additionally displayed. If it is described in a form that clearly shows the rendering content of the production, and the additional production is displayed, it is displayed in addition to the rendering content of the base production. If the rendering content of the effect is specified from the display data table and the effect that is additionally displayed is not displayed, the rendering content that is additionally displayed is discarded, and the effect that becomes the base Only the drawing contents may be specified from the display data table. This eliminates the need for an additional data table that prescribes the rendering content to be additionally displayed. This eliminates the need for control of the additional data table, thereby reducing the processing load.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. A display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, the data table can be efficiently provided by making the variation effect as elements and preparing the display data table corresponding to each element.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the additional data table use the common pointer 233c to specify the drawing contents and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233c. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a, from the main controller 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233a. As described above, this may be set again in the display data table buffer 233a with a confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233a. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, the case has been described in which the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9”, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the additional data table have been described with respect to the case where the content (drawing content) of the image to be drawn at that time is specified in correspondence with the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and any display contents may be defined as long as predetermined time intervals are specified. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table and the additional data table may define the display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  In addition, in the display data table and the additional data table, the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored instead of instructing the sprite type itself as the sprite type to be drawn that is defined for each predetermined time interval. The address of the character ROM 234 may be specified. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the continuous notice effect is also executed on the third symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine 10 includes the third symbol display device 81 and Even if the fourth notice display device is provided and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81, the continuous notice effect is executed. Good. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or by the sound lamp control device 113. Moreover, the continuous notice effect may be executed by providing the accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous notice effect may be executed by turning on or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (and the 1st symbol display device 37), the symbols are continuously displayed on the 4th symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Or a sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting units 29 to 33 are turned on or blinking, so that the player can have a big hit expectation. In addition, the player usually keeps on playing the game while paying attention to the 3rd symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed, but the 4D symbol display device other than the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the symbol. Because the continuous announcement effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting parts 29 to 33, an effect different from the normal effect is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the sound output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 226 A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. Also, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the 3rd symbol display device 81, display by the 4th symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33) Or a combination of them) to prepare a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous notice effect (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, 15R normal big hit, off) Also good.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the image for continuous notification effects different from a variation effect was displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 when a continuous notification effect was performed, it is not necessarily restricted to this. Instead, the continuous notice effect may be performed by displaying a so-called “chance eye” which is a combination of predetermined symbols as a stop symbol displayed when the variation effect is finished. In this case, when the reception of the continuous notice command is determined in the other command processing (S12722 in FIG. 31) of the command determination processing executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on. At the same time, other stop symbol determination flags may be set to OFF. In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command processes, so the chance eye is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. Set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance item can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. If the chance symbols are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot is finally obtained.

  In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 notifies the sound lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls added by “1” when there is a winning (start winning) at the first entrance 64. For the number command, the case where the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer with the starting winning prize are included and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described. The counter type may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include other counter values. In addition, when the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the values of the respective counters acquired with the start winning prize, the information indicating the values of these counters is included in the reserved ball number command. Instead of this, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command different from the reserved ball number command, and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As another command, a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in accordance with the start winning prize may be used, or other information such as a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired along with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in accordance with the start winning prize is notified to the audio lamp control device 113, the value of each counter notified to the command is a variable effect corresponding to any number of holding times. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the information regarding the number of times of holding included in the command, in each of the pre-read information first to fourth areas corresponding to the number of holding times, A counter value can be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a reserved ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the held ball number command are stored in the prefetch information storage area 233b. The case has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. When a pending ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, it is based on the value of each counter indicated by the command. Whether or not, whether or not, jackpot type in the case of jackpot, part or all of the type of missed out in the case of outage, etc., and these determination results, instead of the value of each counter indicated by the command, or The pre-read information storage area 233b may be stored together with part or all of the counter value. As a result, when the prefetching process is executed based on the pressing operation of the notification button 23 or the like, the determination result such as whether or not the variation effect being executed or held is a big hit is already stored in the prefetching information storage area 233b. Therefore, in the prefetching process, it is only necessary to read the determination result, and the execution of the process can be completed quickly. In addition, when the variation time of the variation effect is determined according to the number of retained balls at the time when the execution of the variation effect is started (strictly, when the big hit lottery is performed), When the command indicating the value of each counter) is received, the number of reserved balls when the variation effect is started cannot be determined, so the variation time cannot be accurately determined. Therefore, in this case, it is preferable to store at least the value of the variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation time in the prefetch information storage area 233b. As a result, when the pre-reading process is executed, if the launching of the ball to the game area is stopped, the number of balls to be held when the variation effect is started can be determined, so that it is stored in the pre-read information storage area 233b. It is possible to calculate the variation time based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, together with the determination result of whether or not it is a big hit, the jackpot type in the case of a big hit, and the determination result of the outage type in the case of a loss.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where one first entrance 64 that starts a lottery lottery when a player enters the game is described in the game board 13, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. A plurality of (for example, two) first entrances at which entrances are detected independently and a jackpot lottery is started may be arranged in the game board 13. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  In addition, when a plurality of first entrance holes are arranged in the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified of the counter value acquired with winning (starting prize) at each first entrance. May be. In this case, the command for notifying the sound lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main controller 110 with the start winning is acquired with the start winning to any of the first entrances. It may include information indicating whether or not In addition, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 when the variation is started includes information indicating which variation effect is associated with the first winning entry to the first entrance. May be. Furthermore, in the sound lamp control device 113, a prefetch information storage area may be prepared for each first entrance. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, a shift process is performed on the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the first entrance that detected the start prize that triggered the variation presentation indicated by the variation pattern command. It can be carried out. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the fluctuating effect on hold for each first entrance can also be held in the sound lamp control device 113. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the outage type, etc. are different depending on the first entrance that has won the start, whether or not each variation effect will be a big hit in the look-ahead processing It is possible to correctly determine whether or not the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, the losing type when the jackpot is missed, and the like based on which start winning prize to which first entrance. In addition, when the variation effect based on the start winning at one first entrance is preferentially performed over the variation effect based on the start winning at another first entrance, Pre-fetch processing can be performed in order from the counter value corresponding to the variation production based on the start winning prize at the ball outlet, and the number of suspensions of the variation production that will be the biggest jackpot can be judged correctly. It is possible to inform the player of the number of suspensions of the fluctuating effect that becomes a big hit notification image.

  When a plurality of first entrances are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 uses the command from the main control unit 110 to obtain the value of each counter obtained based on the start winning to the first entrance. If the start of the continuous notice effect is decided when received, the continuous notice effect is executed over all the fluctuating effects (holding balls) that are held at that time regardless of the first entrance where the starting prize was received. May be. In addition, a plurality of first entrances are provided, and a variation effect for winning a prize at one first entrance is preferentially executed over a change effect for winnings at another first entrance. In the pachinko machine, the start of the continuous notice effect may be determined only from the prefetch result of the counter value acquired for the winning at the first entrance where the change effect is preferentially executed. . Thereby, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous notice effect is set for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the first entrance with a low priority, and the continuous notice effect is not started for this variable effect. . If the continuous notice effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the first entrance with a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously held at the first entrance with a high priority, There is a risk that the continuous notice effect will not end easily. On the other hand, in this modified example, the presence / absence of the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined for the variation effect corresponding to the winning at the first entrance with a low priority, Since the continuous notice effect is not started, occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is decreased by 1 (see S1108 in FIG. 24). It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the number of reserved balls of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the change pattern command being set by the fluctuation start process (S307). The reserved ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 (see S305 in FIG. 16). It may be transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 together with the transmission of the command. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 more accurately. In this case, S1108 in FIG. 24 is omitted. Further, the value (N) of the retained ball number counter 203a after the subtraction may be included in the variation pattern command. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 112 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the voice lamp control apparatus 112 may extract the reserved ball number (N) included in the fluctuation pattern command and set it in the held ball number counter 223a.

  In the above-described embodiment, it is configured that each of the winning at the first entrance 64 and the passing through the second entrance 67 is held up to 4 times at maximum, but the maximum number of held balls is limited to 4 times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning at the first entrance 64 is numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. You may comprise.

  Further, as shown in the above-described embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation that scrolls all the symbols Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed variation is described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

An acquisition unit that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a determination unit that performs determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a display unit that stores identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit. Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, In the gaming machine that gives the gaming value of
Storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit until at least the information acquired by the acquisition means is used for determination by the determination means;
Whether there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means A judging means for judging;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Detecting means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means;
A gaming machine A1 comprising: a notification means for notifying based on a determination result by the determination means when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. .

  According to the gaming machine A1, information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and determination is performed by the determination unit based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit until it is used for determination by at least the determination unit. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit, the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit, Execution of dynamic display of identification information based on the information is suspended. Here, the predetermined identification information is displayed in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information for which execution is suspended. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information to be issued is determined by the determining means. Then, when the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit that can be operated by the player, the notification unit performs notification based on the determination result by the determination unit. Accordingly, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended based on the notification by the notification unit. It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can easily determine whether or not the game can be stopped immediately when the player wants to leave the seat or finishes the business.

In the gaming machine A1,
The determination means includes a dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and a dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. It is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. That is, dynamic display of identification information executed based on each piece of information stored in the storage means, that is, not only dynamic display of identification information whose execution is suspended, but also dynamic display execution means Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, including the dynamic display of the identification information in it, is determined by the determination means, and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. When it is detected by the detection means, notification by the notification means is performed based on the determination result by the determination means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, based on the notification by the notification means, not only the dynamic display of the identification information pending execution but also the dynamic of the identification information being executed It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears, including display. Therefore, when it is grasped by the notification by the notification means that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of these identification information, Since the predetermined identification information is not displayed even in the display, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player make a decision to immediately leave the seat or complete the business.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2,
The determination means includes a dynamic display of other identification information before the dynamic display of the identification information is executed out of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information stored in the storage means. In the dynamic display of identification information in which the number of holdings, which is the number of displays, is less than or equal to a predetermined number, it is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of other identification information is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. In the dynamic display of identification information in which the number of hold times, which is a predetermined number, is less than or equal to the predetermined number, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. When the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit, the notification unit performs notification based on the determination result by the determination unit. Thereby, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, based on the notification by the notification means, the dynamic display of the identification information whose number of suspensions is equal to or less than the predetermined number, that is, identification information that can be immediately executed. In the dynamic display, it is possible to grasp whether or not predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, it is easy for the player to decide whether or not to stop the game and finish the task when the player can leave the seat in a short time or when the task is completed soon. There is an effect that it can be judged.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2,
The determination means displays the predetermined identification information before the first time elapses in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine A4 that determines whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, among the dynamic display of identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears before the first time elapses Whether or not there is is determined by the determining means. When the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit, the notification unit performs notification based on the determination result by the determination unit. Thus, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information before the first time elapses based on the notification by the notification unit. It is possible to grasp whether or not. Therefore, if the player can leave the seat within the first time, or if the business is completed within the first time, whether or not the game can be stopped and the seat can be finished There is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4,
The informing means displays a dynamic display of identification information by which the predetermined identification information appears by the determination means when it is detected that the detection means has performed a predetermined operation on the operation means. A gaming machine A5 that performs a first notification based on being determined to be present.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, there are the following effects. That is, when the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit, the determination unit determines that there is a dynamic display of the identification information on which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the first notification is performed by the notification means. Thereby, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, if the first notification is made, it is immediately recognized that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, there is an effect that a decision to continue the game can be made immediately until the predetermined identification information appears.

In gaming machine A5,
The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the first notification performed by the notification means notifies at least which identification information is dynamically displayed in which the predetermined identification information appears.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A5, when the first notification is made, the notification means notifies at least which identification information is dynamically displayed when the predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, the player can determine whether or not he / she can leave or complete the business before the dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. is there.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A6,
The informing means displays a dynamic display of identification information by which the predetermined identification information appears by the determination means when it is detected that the detection means has performed a predetermined operation on the operation means. A gaming machine A7 that performs a second notification based on the determination that there is no such game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, there are the following effects. That is, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the determination means determines that there is no dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the second notification is performed by the notification means. Thereby, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, if the second notification is made, it is immediately recognized that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. As a result, it is possible to immediately make a decision to stop the game as it is and to leave the seat or do business. On the other hand, even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, if the second notification is not performed on the notification means, the player has a sense of expectation that the predetermined identification information may appear. There is an effect that it is possible to make a decision to continue the game while having it.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7,
The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the detection means detects whether or not an operation on the operation means has been continuously performed for a second time or more as the predetermined operation.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are produced. That is, when the player operates the operation means continuously for the second time or more, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detection means, and the notification means notifies the user based on the determination result by the determination means. Done. If the operating means is operated continuously for more than the second time, it can be determined that the operation means has been performed based on the player's intention, while the operating time of the operating means is less than the second time In this case, it can be determined that the player has operated the operating means unintentionally. In the gaming machine A8, when the player unintentionally operates the operation means in this way, the player knows by notification whether or not predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that it can be suppressed and deprivation of the fun of the game can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7,
The game machine A9 is characterized in that the detection means detects whether or not an operation on the operation means has been performed a predetermined number of times within a third time as the predetermined operation.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are produced. That is, when the player performs an operation on the operation means a predetermined number of times within the third time, the operation is detected as the predetermined operation by the detection means, and the notification means performs notification based on the determination result by the determination means. Is called. If the operating means is operated a predetermined number of times within the third time, it can be determined that it has been performed based on the player's intention, while if the operating means is not operated a predetermined number of times within the third time, It can be determined that the user has operated the operating means unintentionally. In the gaming machine A9, when the player has unintentionally operated the operation means in this way, the player knows by notification whether or not predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that it can be suppressed and deprivation of the fun of the game can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9,
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means is based on the determination result by the determination means until the operation on the operation means is completed. A gaming machine A10 that performs notification.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit, the operation on the operation unit is completed. In the meantime, notification by the notification means is performed based on the determination result by the determination means. As a result, when the operation on the operation unit is completed, the notification is also terminated. Therefore, when the player grasps the determination result by the determination unit based on the notification, the player terminates the operation of the operation unit, thereby terminating the notification by the notification unit. Can be made. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress notification by the notification means more than necessary, it is possible to grasp whether or not a person other than the player has a dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that can be suppressed.

An acquisition unit that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a determination unit that performs determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a display unit that stores identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit. Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, In the gaming machine that gives the gaming value of
Storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit until at least the information acquired by the acquisition means is used for determination by the determination means;
Calculating means for calculating an execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Detecting means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means;
A gaming machine comprising: an informing means for informing the execution time calculated by the calculating means when the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means. B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, information is acquired by the acquisition unit in response to establishment of a predetermined start condition, and determination is performed by the determination unit based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit until it is used for determination by at least the determination unit. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit, the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit, Execution of dynamic display of identification information based on the information is suspended. Here, each execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display of the identification information for which execution is suspended is calculated by the calculation means. The Then, when the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit that can be operated by the player, the notification unit notifies the execution time calculated by the calculation unit. Thereby, when a player performs predetermined operation with respect to an operation means, based on the alert | report by an alerting | reporting means, each execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information with which execution was suspended can be grasped | ascertained. Therefore, if a player wants to leave or completes a request, if there is a dynamic display of identification information with a long execution time, the player stops the game and leaves the game while the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player easily make a decision to finish the business.

In gaming machine B1,
The calculation means includes an execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and a dynamic of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. Calculate the remaining execution time until the display execution ends,
The notifying unit is configured to leave the execution time calculated by the calculating unit and the remaining execution time as an execution time to be left when the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information that is executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, not only the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information that is suspended, but also the dynamic display execution The calculation means, including the remaining execution time until the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the means is completed, and the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. The execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information pending execution calculated by the calculation means and the remaining execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. The notification means notifies the user. Thereby, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, based on the notification by the notification means, not only the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended, but also the identification information being executed It is possible to make the player grasp the remaining variation time of the dynamic display. Therefore, if a player wants to leave or completes a task, if the remaining execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information being executed is long, he will immediately stop the game and try to leave or complete the task. There is an effect that the player can easily make the determination.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
Whether there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means A judgment means for judging,
The informing means displays a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears by the judging means when the detection means detects that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. A gaming machine B3, which is configured to notify the execution time calculated by the calculation means based on being determined to be present.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, in the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information to be determined is determined by the determining means. When there is a dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player. Based on the determination by the determination means, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, if the execution time is notified, it is immediately recognized that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. The decision to continue the game until the specified identification information appears, or to leave or do business before the specified identification information appears based on the notified execution time. If there is no notification, there is an effect that it is possible to immediately make a decision to leave the office or finish the business immediately after the execution of the dynamic display of the pending identification information is started.

In gaming machine B3,
The determination means includes a dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and a dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. It is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B3, the following effects are achieved. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display execution means as well as the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, including the dynamic display of the identification information in it, is determined by the determination means, and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. When the detection means detects that the execution time calculated by the calculation means is based on the determination means determining that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. It is notified by the notification means. As a result, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, based on the notification by the notification means, not only the dynamic display of the identification information pending execution but also the dynamic of the identification information being executed It is possible to grasp whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears, including display. Therefore, when it is grasped by the notification by the notification means that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of these identification information, Since the predetermined identification information is not displayed even in the display, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player make a decision to immediately leave the seat or complete the business.

In gaming machine B3 or B4,
The determination means includes a dynamic display of other identification information before the dynamic display of the identification information is executed out of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information stored in the storage means. In the dynamic display of identification information in which the number of holdings, which is the number of displays, is less than or equal to a predetermined number, it is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the following effects are produced. That is, among the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on the information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of other identification information is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. In the dynamic display of identification information in which the number of hold times, which is a predetermined number, is less than or equal to the predetermined number, the determination means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. When the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit, the determination unit determines that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the notifying means notifies the execution time calculated by the calculating means. Thereby, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, based on the notification by the notification means, the dynamic display of the identification information whose number of suspensions is equal to or less than the predetermined number, that is, identification information that can be immediately executed. In the dynamic display, it is possible to grasp whether or not predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, it is easy for the player to decide whether or not to stop the game and finish the task when the player can leave the seat in a short time or when the task is completed soon. There is an effect that it can be judged.

In gaming machine B3 or B4,
The determination means displays the predetermined identification information before the first time elapses in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine B6 that determines whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B3 or B4, the following effects are produced. That is, among the dynamic display of identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, the dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears before the first time elapses Whether or not there is is determined by the determining means. When the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit, the determination unit determines that there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. Based on this, the notifying means notifies the execution time calculated by the calculating means. Thus, when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation unit, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information before the first time elapses based on the notification by the notification unit. It is possible to grasp whether or not. Therefore, if the player can leave the seat within the first time, or if the business is completed within the first time, whether or not the game can be stopped and the seat can be finished There is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment.

In any of gaming machines B3 to B6,
The notifying unit is configured to notify at least which identification information is dynamically displayed together with the notification of the execution time so that the predetermined identification information appears.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B3 to B6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the notification of the execution time is performed by the notification means, at least which identification information is dynamically displayed to which the predetermined identification information appears is notified. Accordingly, when the player is notified of the execution time, the player can grasp which identification information is dynamically displayed in which the predetermined identification information appears, so that the predetermined identification information appears. Can be easily grasped. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine whether he / she can leave or complete the business before the dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. .

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7,
When the detection means detects that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the detection means, and there is a dynamic display of the identification information on which the predetermined identification information appears, the notification means The gaming machine B8 is characterized by notifying the execution time calculated by the calculation means for dynamic display of identification information until predetermined identification information appears.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is detected by the detection means that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, if there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, the predetermined identification information is displayed. The execution time calculated by the calculation means for the dynamic display of the identification information until it is issued is notified by the notification means. Thereby, in the notification by the notification means, the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information until the predetermined identification information appears can be made easy to understand for the player, so that the predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player easily judge whether to stop the game by the time before the game is finished or to finish the task or to decide the countryside.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B8,
The predetermined start condition is established when a game medium launched into a predetermined game area has won a prize or passed through an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area,
The gaming machine includes stop state determination means for determining whether or not the game medium is stopped from being emitted to the predetermined game area.
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, the notification means stops the emission of the game medium to the predetermined game area by the stop state determination means. The gaming machine B9 is characterized in that the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified on the condition that it is determined that the game machine is in a state.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined start condition is established when the game medium launched into the predetermined game area wins or passes through the operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area, It is determined by the stop state determination means whether or not the emission of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the stop state determination means stops the release of the game medium to the predetermined game area. The execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means on the condition that it is determined that it is in the state. The execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information is determined according to the number of the dynamic display of the identification information suspended in the storage means when the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information is started There is. If the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped, the execution time of the dynamic display of the pending identification information can be accurately calculated even in such a case. It is possible to make the player know the exact execution time by notifying the execution time calculated by the calculation means on the condition that it is determined that the release of the game medium to the area is stopped. it can. Therefore, if a player wants to leave or completes a request, if there is a dynamic display of identification information with a long execution time, the player stops the game and leaves the game while the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to make a player make a decision to finish a business based on an accurate execution time.

In gaming machine B9,
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, the notification means stops the emission of the game medium to the predetermined game area by the stop state determination means. The game machine B10 is characterized in that when it is determined that it is not in a state, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified as a reference value.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, it is determined by the stop state determination means that the release of the game medium to the predetermined game area is not stopped. Sometimes, the notifying means notifies the execution time calculated by the calculating means as a reference value. As a result, when the player wants to leave the seat or completes the business, even if the game medium is not stopped from being launched into the predetermined game area, the predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. Since the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information is notified as a reference value, if there is a dynamic display of the identification information with a long execution time based on the reference value, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed. During this period, the player can make a decision to stop the game and finish his / her seat or business.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B10,
The game machine B11 is characterized in that the detection means detects whether or not an operation on the operation means has been continuously performed for a second time or more as the predetermined operation.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the following effects are produced. That is, when the player continuously operates the operation means for the second time or more, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detection means, and the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. Is done. If the operating means is operated continuously for more than the second time, it can be determined that the operation means has been performed based on the player's intention, while the operating time of the operating means is less than the second time In this case, it can be determined that the player has operated the operating means unintentionally. In the gaming machine B11, it is possible to suppress the player from knowing the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information by notification when the player has unintentionally operated the operation means in this way, There is an effect that the deprivation of the fun of the game can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B10,
The game machine B12, wherein the detection means detects whether the operation with respect to the operation means has been performed a predetermined number of times within a third time as the predetermined operation.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, the following effects are produced. That is, when the player performs an operation on the operation means a predetermined number of times within the third time, the operation is detected as the predetermined operation by the detection means, and the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified by the notification means. The If the operating means is operated a predetermined number of times within the third time, it can be determined that it has been performed based on the player's intention, while if the operating means is not operated a predetermined number of times within the third time, It can be determined that the user has operated the operating means unintentionally. In the gaming machine B12, when the player has operated the operating means unintentionally in this way, it is possible to suppress the player from knowing the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information by notification, There is an effect that the deprivation of the fun of the game can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B12,
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means calculates the execution calculated by the calculation means until the operation on the operation means is completed. A gaming machine B13 characterized by notifying time.

  According to the gaming machine B13, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B12, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the operation on the operation means is completed. Until this time, the execution time calculated by the calculation means is notified. Thus, when the operation on the operation means is completed, the notification is also ended. Therefore, when the player grasps the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information based on the notification, the notification means is ended by ending the operation of the operation means. Can be terminated. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the notification by the notification means more than necessary, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a person other than the player from grasping the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information.

An acquisition unit that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a determination unit that performs determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a display unit that stores identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit. Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, In the gaming machine that gives the gaming value of
Storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit until at least the information acquired by the acquisition means is used for determination by the determination means;
Calculation means for calculating a time until the predetermined identification information appears based on the information stored in the storage means;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Detecting means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means;
An informing means for informing a time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculating means appears when it is detected by the detecting means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means; A gaming machine C1 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C1, information is acquired by the acquisition unit in response to establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the determination unit performs determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit until it is used for determination by at least the determination unit. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit, the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit, Execution of dynamic display of identification information based on the information is suspended. Here, based on each of the information stored in the storage means, the time until the predetermined identification information appears is calculated by the calculation means. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears Is notified by the notification means. Thereby, when a player performs predetermined operation with respect to an operation means, based on the alerting | reporting by an alerting | reporting means, the time until predetermined | prescribed identification information appears can be grasped | ascertained. Therefore, if the player wants to leave the seat or completes the business, the player is given a decision to stop the game and finish the seat or business before the specified identification information appears. There is an effect that it can be made easy.

In the gaming machine C1,
Whether there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means A judgment means for judging,
The informing means displays a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears by the judging means when the detection means detects that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means. If it is determined that there is no game machine C2, the notification is not executed.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, in the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information to be determined is determined by the determining means. When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears. When it is determined by the determination unit, the notification by the notification unit is not executed. As a result, even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, if there is no notification, the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended. It can be understood that there is no dynamic display. Therefore, in this case, at least when the execution of the dynamic display of the pending identification information is started, it is possible to make it easy for the player to determine that the game can be stopped and the player can leave the seat or complete the business. effective.

In the gaming machine C2,
The determination means includes a dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, and a dynamic display of the identification information being executed by the dynamic display execution means. It is determined whether or not there is a dynamic display of identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means, that is, the dynamic display execution means as well as the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution is suspended. Whether or not there is a dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, including the dynamic display of the identification information in it, is determined by the determination means, and a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. When the detection means detects that there is no dynamic display of the identification information in which the predetermined identification information appears, the notification by the notification means is not executed. Thereby, even if the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, if there is no notification, not only in the dynamic display of the identification information that is suspended, but also in the dynamic display of the identification information being executed, It can be understood that there is no dynamic display of identification information in which predetermined identification information appears. Therefore, in this case, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player easily judge that the game can be immediately stopped and the user can leave the seat or complete the business.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3,
The predetermined start condition is established when a game medium launched into a predetermined game area has won a prize or passed through an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area,
The gaming machine includes stop state determination means for determining whether or not the game medium is stopped from being emitted to the predetermined game area.
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, the notification means stops the emission of the game medium to the predetermined game area by the stop state determination means. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that it notifies the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears on the condition that it is determined that the player is in a state.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the predetermined start condition is established when the game medium launched into the predetermined game area wins or passes through the operation port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area, It is determined by the stop state determination means whether or not the emission of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped. Then, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means that can be operated by the player, the stop state determination means stops the release of the game medium to the predetermined game area. The time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculating means appears is notified by the notifying means on the condition that it is determined that it is in the state. The execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information is determined according to the number of the dynamic display of the identification information suspended in the storage means when the execution of the dynamic display of the identification information is started There is. If the launch of the game medium to the predetermined game area is stopped, the execution time of the dynamic display of the pending identification information can be accurately calculated even in such a case. It is more accurate to notify the time until the predetermined identification information is calculated, which is calculated by the calculation means, on the condition that it is determined that the game medium is stopped in the area. It is possible to make the player know the time. Therefore, if the player wants to leave the seat or completes the business, the decision to stop the game and finish the seat or business before the specified identification information appears will be accurate. There is an effect that the player can be made based on.

In gaming machine C4,
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means, the notification means stops the emission of the game medium to the predetermined game area by the stop state determination means. The game machine C5 is characterized in that, when it is determined that it is not in a state, the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means is displayed as a reference value.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are produced. That is, when it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, it is determined by the stop state determination means that the release of the game medium to the predetermined game area is not stopped. Sometimes, the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears is notified by the notification means as a reference value. As a result, when the player wants to leave the seat or completes the business, even if the game medium is not stopped from being launched into the predetermined game area, the predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. The time until the specified identification information appears is reported as a reference value, so based on the reference value, the game is stopped and the player can leave or use the game until the predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that the player can make a decision to finish the matter.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5,
The gaming machine C6, wherein the detection means detects whether or not an operation on the operation means has been continuously performed for a second time or more as the predetermined operation.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, the following effects are produced. That is, when the player continuously operates the operation means for the second time or more, the operation is detected as a predetermined operation by the detection means, and the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears. The notification time is notified by the notification means. If the operating means is operated continuously for more than the second time, it can be determined that the operation means has been performed based on the player's intention, while the operating time of the operating means is less than the second time In this case, it can be determined that the player has operated the operating means unintentionally. In the gaming machine C6, when the player has unintentionally operated the operation means in this way, the player knows by notification that the time until the predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that it can be suppressed and deprivation of the fun of the game can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5,
The game machine C7, wherein the detection means detects whether or not an operation on the operation means has been performed a predetermined number of times within a third time as the predetermined operation.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the player performs an operation on the operation means a predetermined number of times within the third time, the operation is detected as the predetermined operation by the detection means, and the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means is displayed. The notification time is notified by the notification means. If the operating means is operated a predetermined number of times within the third time, it can be determined that it has been performed based on the player's intention, while if the operating means is not operated a predetermined number of times within the third time, It can be determined that the user has operated the operating means unintentionally. In the gaming machine C7, when the player unintentionally operates the operation means in this way, the player knows by notification that the time until the predetermined identification information appears. There is an effect that it can be suppressed and deprivation of the fun of the game can be suppressed.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7,
When the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification means calculates the predetermined value calculated by the calculation means until the operation on the operation means is completed. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that it notifies the time until the identification information of the game is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C8, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the operation on the operation means is completed. In the meantime, the time until the predetermined identification information calculated by the calculation means appears is notified. As a result, when the operation on the operation means is completed, the notification is also terminated. Therefore, when the player grasps the time until the predetermined identification information appears based on the notification, the player can terminate the operation of the operation means. The notification by the notification means can be terminated. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the notification by the notification means more than necessary, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a person other than the player from grasping the time until the predetermined identification information appears.

An acquisition unit that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a determination unit that performs determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a display unit that stores identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit. Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, In the gaming machine that gives the gaming value of
Storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit until at least the information acquired by the acquisition means is used for determination by the determination means;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Detecting means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means;
A notification means for performing notification based on information stored in the storage means when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
When it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, then the notification by the notification means is not executed even if the predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. A gaming machine D1 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, information is acquired by the acquisition unit in response to establishment of a predetermined start condition, and determination is performed by the determination unit based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit until it is used for determination by at least the determination unit. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit, the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit, Execution of dynamic display of identification information based on the information is suspended. Here, when the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit that can be operated by the player, the notification unit performs notification based on information stored in the storage unit. . Thereby, when a player performs predetermined operation with respect to an operation means, based on the alerting | reporting by an alerting | reporting means, the information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information with execution suspended can be grasped | ascertained. Therefore, based on the information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information that is pending execution based on the notification whether or not the game can be stopped immediately when the player wants to leave or completes the business Thus, there is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment. Further, when it is detected by the detection means that the predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification by the notification means is not executed by the non-execution means even if the predetermined operation is subsequently performed on the operation means. The Thereby, even if a player other than the player operates the operating means while the player leaves the seat based on the notification, it is possible to suppress the notification result from being known to a non-player. Therefore, there is an effect that the profit of the person who originally played the game can be protected.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8,
When it is detected by the detection means that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, then the notification by the notification means is not executed even if the predetermined operation is performed on the operation means. A gaming machine D2 comprising means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8, the following effects are produced. That is, when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means, the notification by the notification means is not executed by the non-execution means even if a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means thereafter. The Thereby, even when a player leaves the seat based on the notification, even if a player other than the player operates the operation means, it is possible to prevent the notification result from being known to a player other than the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the profit of the person who originally played the game can be protected.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2,
Storage judgment means for judging whether all information stored in the storage means has been used for judgment by the judgment means;
A release means for canceling non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means when it is determined by the storage determination means that all information stored in the storage means has been used for the determination by the determination means. A gaming machine D3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, when the storage determination unit determines that all information stored in the storage unit is used for the determination by the determination unit, the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution unit is canceled by the cancellation unit. Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the result of notification to a person other than the player until at least all the information stored in the storage unit is used for the determination by the determination unit. Further, when all the information stored in the storage means is used for the determination by the determination means, the dynamic display of the identification information that has been suspended due to the game of the person who originally played the game is once executed. Since it is considered, there is an effect that a player who has played a game after that can obtain a notification based on the operation by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2,
Storage judgment means for judging whether or not all the information stored in the storage means used for notification by the notification means has been used for determination by the determination means;
When the storage determining means determines that all the information stored in the storage means used for notification by the notification means has been used for determination by the determination means, the notification by the non-execution means And a release means for releasing non-execution of the game machine D4.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means is canceled when the storage determination means determines that all the information stored in the storage means used for the notification by the notification means has been used for the determination by the determination means. Released by means. As a result, until all the information stored in the storage means used for notification by the notification means is used for the determination by the determination means, the notification result cannot be grasped for a person other than the player. There is an effect that can be made. In addition, when all the information stored in the storage means used for notification by the notification means is used for determination by the determination means, the player again performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, so that the previous notification is performed. Since the information can be notified by the notification means using the information obtained after the information used for the purpose and stored in the storage means, there is an effect that the player can have many notification opportunities. .

In the gaming machine D1 or D2,
A gaming machine D5, comprising: release means for releasing non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the following effects are produced. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, non-execution of notification by the non-execution means is canceled by the cancellation means. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to make it impossible for a person other than the player to grasp the result of the notification until the predetermined start condition is satisfied at least after the notification is not executed. In addition, if a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the player can perform a predetermined operation on the operation unit again, thereby making a determination by the determination unit using information stored in the storage unit after the determination by the determination unit. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can have a lot of notification opportunities based on information newly acquired and stored in the storage means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D5,
Second release means for releasing non-execution of the notification by the non-execution means when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means; A gaming machine D6 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, the following effects are produced. That is, the non-execution of notification by the non-execution means is canceled by the second cancellation means when the predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means. . The player may continue playing the game without leaving the seat or requesting a notification based on a predetermined operation performed on the operation means. In some cases, a dynamic display of identification information whose execution has been suspended may be left at a stage where a predetermined game value is given. The player can perform notification on the dynamic display of the identification information whose execution has been suspended when a predetermined game value is given by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means again. Therefore, after giving a predetermined game value, the player can determine again whether or not the player can immediately perform the action of leaving the seat or completing the business at that stage.

An acquisition unit that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a determination unit that performs determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a display unit that stores identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit. Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, In the gaming machine that gives the gaming value of
Storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit until at least the information acquired by the acquisition means is used for determination by the determination means;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Detecting means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means;
A notification means for performing notification based on information stored in the storage means when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
Accepting means for accepting input of the second information given to the player;
Output means for outputting third information relating to a gaming state after the input is received by the receiving means based on an instruction from a player;
When the notification means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the detection means from when the input is received by the reception means to when an output is made by the output means. A gaming machine D7 characterized in that the game machine D7 is used.

  According to the gaming machine D7, information is acquired by the acquisition unit when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and determination is performed by the determination unit based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit until it is used for determination by at least the determination unit. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit, the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit, Execution of dynamic display of identification information based on the information is suspended. Here, when the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit that can be operated by the player, the notification unit performs notification based on information stored in the storage unit. . Thereby, when a player performs predetermined operation with respect to an operation means, based on the alerting | reporting by an alerting | reporting means, the information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information with execution suspended can be grasped | ascertained. Therefore, based on the information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information that is pending execution based on the notification whether or not the game can be stopped immediately when the player wants to leave or completes the business Thus, there is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment. The input of the second information given to the player is received by the receiving means, and the third information relating to the gaming state after the input is received by the receiving means based on the instruction from the player is output by the output means. The When the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit from when the input is received by the reception unit to when the output is performed by the output unit, the notification unit performs notification. . As a result, the person who has input the second information given to the player can obtain the notification by the notification means by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means, and can cause the output means to output the third information regarding the gaming state. For example, even if the person leaves, there is an effect that another person can perform a predetermined operation on the operation means so that the result of the notification cannot be grasped.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8,
Accepting means for accepting input of the second information given to the player;
Output means for outputting third information relating to a gaming state after the input is received by the receiving means based on an instruction from a player;
When the notification means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means by the detection means from when the input is received by the reception means to when an output is made by the output means. A gaming machine D8, characterized in that the game machine D8 is used.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8, the following effects are produced. That is, the input of the second information given to the player is received by the receiving means, and the third information relating to the gaming state after the input is received by the receiving means based on an instruction from the player is output by the output means. The When the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit from when the input is received by the reception unit to when the output is performed by the output unit, the notification unit performs notification. . As a result, the person who has input the second information given to the player can obtain the notification by the notification means by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means, and can cause the output means to output the third information regarding the gaming state. For example, even if the person leaves, there is an effect that another person can perform a predetermined operation on the operation means so that the result of the notification cannot be grasped.

An acquisition unit that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a determination unit that performs determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a display unit that stores identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit. Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, In the gaming machine that gives the gaming value of
Storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit until at least the information acquired by the acquisition means is used for determination by the determination means;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Detecting means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means;
A notification means for performing notification based on information stored in the storage means when the detection means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation means;
First receiving means for receiving input of the fourth information from the player;
Second receiving means for receiving input of the fifth information from the player,
The notification means is configured to detect the operation means by the detection means from when the input of the fourth information is received by the first reception means to when the input of the fifth information is received by the second reception means. A gaming machine D9, which performs notification when it is detected that a predetermined operation has been performed.

  According to the gaming machine D9, information is acquired by the acquisition unit in response to establishment of a predetermined start condition, and determination is performed by the determination unit based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit. Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information on the display means. When predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information, a predetermined game value is given to the player. The information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit until it is used for determination by at least the determination unit. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied while the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display execution unit, the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit, Execution of dynamic display of identification information based on the information is suspended. Here, when the detection unit detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operation unit that can be operated by the player, the notification unit performs notification based on information stored in the storage unit. . Thereby, when a player performs predetermined operation with respect to an operation means, based on the alerting | reporting by an alerting | reporting means, the information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information with execution suspended can be grasped | ascertained. Therefore, based on the information regarding the dynamic display of the identification information that is pending execution based on the notification whether or not the game can be stopped immediately when the player wants to leave or completes the business Thus, there is an effect that the player can easily make a judgment. Further, the input of the fourth information from the player is received by the first receiving means, and the input of the fifth information from the player is received by the second receiving means. Then, a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means by the detecting means from when the input of the fourth information is received by the first receiving means until the input of the fifth information is received by the second receiving means. When it is detected, notification by the notification means is performed. Thus, if a person who has input the fourth information obtains a notification by the notification means by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means and inputs the fifth information, even if the person leaves the seat, However, it is possible to prevent the notification result from being grasped by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means. Note that the fourth information and the fifth information may be the same or different.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8,
First receiving means for receiving input of the fourth information from the player;
Second receiving means for receiving input of the fifth information from the player,
The notification means is configured to detect the operation means by the detection means from when the input of the fourth information is received by the first reception means to when the input of the fifth information is received by the second reception means. A gaming machine D10, which performs notification when it is detected that a predetermined operation has been performed.

  According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, and C1 to C8, the following effects are produced. That is, the input of the fourth information from the player is received by the first receiving means, and the input of the fifth information from the player is received by the second receiving means. Then, a predetermined operation is performed on the operating means by the detecting means from when the input of the fourth information is received by the first receiving means until the input of the fifth information is received by the second receiving means. When it is detected, notification by the notification means is performed. Thus, if a person who has input the fourth information obtains a notification by the notification means by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means and inputs the fifth information, even if the person leaves the seat, However, it is possible to prevent the notification result from being grasped by performing a predetermined operation on the operation means. Note that the fourth information and the fifth information may be the same or different.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8, and D1 to D10, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8, and D1 to D10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C8, and D1 to D10, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  The “entrance ball” to the “first entrance 64” described in the above embodiment corresponds to the “predetermined start condition” in the claims, and the “counters C1 to C3,” described in the above embodiment. “CS1 value” corresponds to “information” acquired by “acquisition means” in the claims, and “third symbol” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “identification information” in the claims. The “variation effect” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “dynamic display of identification information” described in the claims, and the “big hit symbol” described in the above embodiments is described in the claims. Corresponding to “predetermined identification information”, “big jackpot” described in the above embodiment corresponds to “predetermined game value” described in the claims.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
23 Notification button (operation means)
64 operation port (first entrance)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means, part of notification means)
114 Display control device (dynamic display execution means, part of notification means)
223b Prefetch information storage area (storage means)
223h Notification button invalid flag (non-execution means)
S204 (Acquisition means)
S307 Variation start processing (determination means)
S1311 (detection means)
S1321 (stop state determination means)
S1334 (Judgment means)
S1335, S1336, S1337, S1340 (part of the notification means)
S1338, S1339 (calculation means)
S1364 (memory judgment means)
S1365 (Release means)

Claims (1)

An acquisition unit that acquires information triggered by the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a determination unit that performs determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and a display unit that stores identification information based on a determination result by the determination unit. Dynamic display execution means for executing dynamic display, and when predetermined identification information appears in the dynamic display of the identification information executed by the dynamic display execution means, In the gaming machine that gives the gaming value of
Storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit until at least the information acquired by the acquisition means is used for determination by the determination means;
Calculating means for calculating an execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information executed based on each of the information stored in the storage means;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Detecting means for detecting that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means;
A gaming machine comprising: an informing means for informing the execution time calculated by the calculating means when the detecting means detects that a predetermined operation has been performed on the operating means. .